Ricoh Pro C9210 Cut Sheet Guide

Ricoh Pro C9210 Cut Sheet Guide
Operator's Guide
Original Instructions
How to Read the Manuals
Manuals Provided with This Machine
Useful Functions
Getting Started
Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Adjustment Settings for Operators
Troubleshooting
Maintenance
For safe and correct use, be sure to read Safety Information before
using the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. How to Read the Manuals
Symbols Used in the Manuals........................................................................................................................... 7
Disclaimer............................................................................................................................................................8
Notes................................................................................................................................................................... 9
Machine Types................................................................................................................................................. 10
Names of Major Features............................................................................................................................... 11
Model-Specific Information.............................................................................................................................12
2. Manuals Provided with This Machine
Manuals for This Machine...............................................................................................................................13
How to Use the Operating Instructions...........................................................................................................15
Read HTML Manuals...................................................................................................................................15
Read the HTML manuals on the control panel.......................................................................................... 16
3. Useful Functions
Registering Custom Paper................................................................................................................................17
Overview of Paper Settings.........................................................................................................................17
Custom Paper Registration Workflow........................................................................................................ 20
How to Use the [Custom Paper Management] Screen.............................................................................20
How to Use the [Import From Master Library] Screen.............................................................................. 22
Registering a Custom Paper........................................................................................................................ 24
Registering a Custom Paper with the Media Identification Unit...............................................................29
Modifying a Custom Paper......................................................................................................................... 34
Custom Paper Settings.................................................................................................................................35
Adjusting the Image Position of Either Side of the Paper.......................................................................... 38
Searching for a Paper by Specifying the Conditions................................................................................41
Printing the Parameters of Custom Paper Settings..................................................................................... 42
Exporting Custom Paper to an SD Card.................................................................................................... 42
Deleting a Custom Paper.............................................................................................................................43
Managing the Master Library.....................................................................................................................43
Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel............................................................. 45
Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel.........................................................45
Creating a Destination of Remote Desktop Connection........................................................................... 46
Configuring the Connection App................................................................................................................48
Allowing Remote Connection from a PC to the Control Panel..................................................................... 50
1
Allowing Remote Operations......................................................................................................................50
Enabling the Remote Connection to the Control Panel.............................................................................51
4. Getting Started
Guide to Names and Functions of Components............................................................................................53
Guide to Functions of the Attention Light....................................................................................................56
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options................................................................................................59
Guide to Functions of the Machine's External Options.............................................................................59
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Internal Options/Option Controller............................................. 75
Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel........................................................... 76
Adjusting the Angle of the Control Panel................................................................................................... 78
Turning On/Off the Power.............................................................................................................................. 79
Turning On/Off the Power..........................................................................................................................79
Turning On the Main Power........................................................................................................................79
Turning Off the Main Power........................................................................................................................80
Saving Energy.............................................................................................................................................. 80
Adjusting the Display....................................................................................................................................... 83
How to Use the [Home] Screen...................................................................................................................... 86
Main Icons on the [Home] Screen..............................................................................................................88
Changing Modes by Pressing the Function Keys...................................................................................... 89
[Printer Status] Screen..................................................................................................................................90
[Tray Paper Settings] Screen.......................................................................................................................91
[Information] Screen.................................................................................................................................... 92
[Web Browser] Screen................................................................................................................................93
[Help] Screen............................................................................................................................................... 95
Possible Operations on the Application Screen........................................................................................96
Changing the Display Language................................................................................................................98
System Reset.................................................................................................................................................99
Logging In the Machine................................................................................................................................ 100
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed........................................................................................100
User Code Authentication Using the Control Panel................................................................................100
Logging In Using the Control Panel......................................................................................................... 101
Logging Out Using the Control Panel...................................................................................................... 102
Auto Logout Function.................................................................................................................................102
2
Logging In Using Web Image Monitor....................................................................................................102
Logging Out Using Web Image Monitor................................................................................................ 103
User Lockout Function............................................................................................................................... 103
Changing the Login Password..................................................................................................................103
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Loading Paper................................................................................................................................................107
Precautions for Loading Paper................................................................................................................. 107
Loading Paper into Trays 1, 2, and the Wide Large Capacity Tray.....................................................109
Loading Paper into the Multi Bypass Tray (Tray A)................................................................................ 112
Loading Paper into the Interposer............................................................................................................ 114
Loading Cover Sheets into the Interposer of the Perfect Binder.............................................................116
Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper........................................................................... 118
Changing the Paper Size.............................................................................................................................. 120
Precautions for Changing the Paper Size................................................................................................120
Changing the Paper Size in Trays 1, 2, and the Wide Large Capacity Tray...................................... 120
Changing to a Size That Is Not Automatically Detected....................................................................... 127
Changing to a Custom Paper Size...........................................................................................................128
Recommended Paper.................................................................................................................................... 129
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types................................................................................................... 129
Paper Weight Conversion Table..............................................................................................................148
Unusable Paper......................................................................................................................................... 150
Paper Storage............................................................................................................................................151
Changing Tray Paper Settings...................................................................................................................... 152
Accessing Tray Paper Settings..................................................................................................................152
Names and Positions of Paper Trays (Trays 1 to 8 and Tray A)........................................................... 153
Tray Paper Settings....................................................................................................................................154
Using the Ring Binder and the High Capacity Stacker...........................................................................163
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
How to Use the [Adjustment Settings for Operators] Screen..................................................................... 171
Accessing the Adjustment Settings for Operators....................................................................................... 172
Features of the Displayed Items and Setting Operations....................................................................... 172
Printing with Adjusted Settings..................................................................................................................174
Menu Items and Functions............................................................................................................................ 176
3
Setting Values.................................................................................................................................................185
Machine: Image Position.......................................................................................................................... 185
Machine: Image Quality...........................................................................................................................194
Machine: Paper Feed/ Output................................................................................................................ 196
Machine: Maintenance............................................................................................................................ 201
Finishing: Finisher.......................................................................................................................................205
Finishing: Fold............................................................................................................................................ 230
Finishing: Perfect Binder............................................................................................................................ 247
Finishing: Stacker.......................................................................................................................................249
Density Difference Printing: Across Feed................................................................................................. 254
Finishing: Interposer.................................................................................................................................. 255
7. Troubleshooting
Getting Started...............................................................................................................................................257
When the Machine Makes a Beeping Sound........................................................................................ 257
When You Check the Indicator Lamps, Status Icons, and Messages on the Control Panel............... 258
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine.............................................................................. 261
When Messages Appear..............................................................................................................................268
When Messages Appear and the Machine Cannot Be Operated.......................................................268
When Other Messages Appear...............................................................................................................271
Clearing Misfeeds......................................................................................................................................... 273
Removing Jammed Paper......................................................................................................................... 273
Removing Jammed Staples....................................................................................................................... 288
Removing Jammed Ring Combs...............................................................................................................291
Removing Punch Waste............................................................................................................................ 292
Removing Staple Waste........................................................................................................................... 293
Removing Waste Paper............................................................................................................................ 293
Adjusting the Color Registration Shift or Printed Color............................................................................... 294
Adjusting Image Quality........................................................................................................................... 294
When the Color Registration Shifts.......................................................................................................... 294
When Unevenness in Density Appears................................................................................................... 295
8. Maintenance
General Requirements...................................................................................................................................297
Dos and Don'ts.......................................................................................................................................... 297
4
Saving Printouts......................................................................................................................................... 299
Backing Up Hard Disk Data..................................................................................................................... 299
Replenishing and Replacing Consumables............................................................................................. 299
Where to Put Your Machine..................................................................................................................... 306
Optimum Environmental Conditions After Moving the Machine...........................................................307
Maintaining Your Machine...........................................................................................................................312
How to Clean the Machine...................................................................................................................... 312
Cleaning the Contact Image Sensor........................................................................................................312
Cleaning the transport roller when using NPC paper............................................................................ 314
Cleaning the transport roller when using synthetic paper......................................................................317
Cleaning the Power Cord Plug.................................................................................................................318
Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers......................................................................................................... 320
Useful Information..................................................................................................................................... 322
5
6
1. How to Read the Manuals
Symbols Used in the Manuals
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates points to pay attention to when using functions. This symbol indicates points that may result in
the product or service becoming unusable or result in the loss of data if the instructions are not obeyed.
Be sure to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.
Indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[]
Indicates the names of keys or buttons on the product or display.
(mainly Europe and Asia), (mainly Europe), or (mainly Asia)
(mainly North America)
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by two symbols. Read the
information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model you are using. For
details about which symbol corresponds to the model you are using, see "Model-Specific Information",
Device Management.
7
1. How to Read the Manuals
Disclaimer
To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer be liable for any
damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the registered data, or the use or
non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine. Documents or
data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the machine.
In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this machine or
any results from the data executed by you.
8
Notes
Notes
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of
parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
9
1. How to Read the Manuals
Machine Types
Check the type of your machine before reading the manuals.
• Type 1: Pro C9200
• Type 2: Pro C9210
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please contact your
local dealer.
10
Names of Major Features
Names of Major Features
In this manual, major features of the machine are referred to as follows:
• Multi Bypass Tray BY5020
Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
• Vacuum Feed LCIT RT5120 Wide Large Capacity Tray (Wide LCT) or Two-tray wide Large
Capacity Tray (Two-tray wide LCT)
• Multi-Folding Unit FD5020
• Ring Binder RB5020
Multi-folding unit
Ring binder
• High Capacity Stacker SK5040
• Trimmer Unit TR5040
• Trimmer Unit TR5050*1
Trimmer
Trimmer
• Cover Interposer Tray CI5030
Interposer CI5030 (Interposer)
• Cover Interposer Tray CI5040*1
• Perfect Binder GB5010
High capacity stacker
Interposer CI5040 (Interposer)
Perfect binder
• Color Controller E-45/E-46*1/E-85/E-86*1
• TotalFlow Print Server R-62
Fiery controller
TotalFlow print server
*1 Depending on when the machine was bought, this option may not be available. For details, contact your
service representative.
11
1. How to Read the Manuals
Model-Specific Information
This section explains how you can identify the region your machine belongs to.
There is a label on the rear of the machine, located in the position shown below. The label contains
details that identify the region your machine belongs to. Read the label.
DET001
The following information is region-specific. Read the information under the symbol that corresponds to
the region of your machine.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a Region A model:
• CODE XXXX -26, -27, -28, -29, -66, -67, -68, -69
• 220–240 V
(mainly North America)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a Region B model:
• CODE XXXX -17, -18, -57, -58
• 208–240 V
• Dimensions in this manual are given in two units of measure: metric and inch. If your machine is a
Region A model, refer to the metric units. If your machine is a Region B model, refer to the inch
units.
• If your machine is a Region A model and "CODE XXXX -26, -27, -66, -67" is printed on the label,
see "
(mainly Europe)" also.
• If your machine is a Region A model and "CODE XXXX -28, -29, -68, -69" is printed on the label,
see "
(mainly Asia)" also.
12
2. Manuals Provided with This Machine
Manuals for This Machine
The operating instructions of this machine are provided in the following formats:
Format
Manuals
Printed manuals
• Safety Information
Manuals displayed on the control panel
• Operating Instructions (HTML manuals)
Web page
• Operator's Guide
• Safety Information
• Operating Instructions (HTML manuals)
• Paper Fundamentals
Operator's Guide
Contains excerpts from the following manuals such as the descriptions of the machine's basic
operations and frequently used functions. It also provides the explanations of how to resolve error
messages that appear.
Safety Information
Contains the explanation about "Safety Information". Be sure to read this manual before you start
using the machine. The manual also provides the information about various regulations and
environmental compatibility.
Preparation
Explains the preparation procedure to use the machine, and describes the control panel. It also
explains the paper specification and how to load paper. It also explains how to use the Master
Library in which different print settings for various papers can be registered, and describes the
frequently used functions and useful features.
Device Management
Explains how to connect the machine to a network, and operate the machine under a network
environment. It also explains how to configure the system initial settings and register the address
book.
Maintenance and Management
Explains how to change consumables. It also describes the installation requirements and cleaning
procedure of the machine, and explains how to resolve problems that occurs. It also explains how
to configure the items of Adjustment Settings for Operators.
13
2. Manuals Provided with This Machine
Security Guide
This manual is intended for the administrator of this machine. It explains various security functions
available on the machine that allows you to prevent unauthorized use of the machine, and
changing and copying of the data.
For enhanced security, it is recommended to perform the followings:
• Install the Device Certificate
• Enable SSL
• Change the user name and password of the administrator
For details, see "Before Using This Machine", Security Guide.
Be sure to read this manual when you are configuring the enhanced security functions and
authentication.
Specifications
Explains the specifications of the machine and its options.
Paper Fundamentals
Explains the properties of different types of paper, and how to handle them.
• Before you configure the extended security and authentication settings, refer to "Before Using This
Machine" in the Security Guide.
• You can see the following manuals on the Web page.
DHCP Option 204
14
How to Use the Operating Instructions
How to Use the Operating Instructions
This section describes the operating instructions of this machine.
Read HTML Manuals
The following browsers are recommended to read the HTML manuals.
• Google Chrome
• Internet Explorer
• Mozilla Firefox
• Microsoft Edge
• Safari
• If JavaScript is disabled or unavailable in your browser, you will not be able to search or use
certain buttons in the HTML documentation.
• The required display resolution is 1,024 × 768 pixels or greater.
• In the help on the top right of the top page, you can check how to use the HTML manuals. The help
topics explain the icons and buttons that are displayed in the HTML manuals.
Search by entering a keyword
You can search through the HTML manuals.
This section explains how to search for "duplex".
1. Enter "duplex" in the search box on the top left of the top page.
2. Click
.
A list of titles or descriptions that include "duplex" appears.
A search result appears in the search result window. In addition you can use the drop-down menu
to select a manual.
3. Click a title to display the item you want to read.
• Use keywords to search for items you want to query. Depending on the keyword you enter, related
keywords might also appear.
• Items including the used keyword is appear in the search result window.
15
2. Manuals Provided with This Machine
• If you put a space between keywords, pages that contain both keywords are displayed. For
example, if you enter "duplex" and a space and "staple", items including both words appear in the
search result window.
Read the HTML manuals on the control panel
You can also read the HTML manuals on the control panel. For details, see page 88 "Main Icons on
the [Home] Screen".
16
3. Useful Functions
This chapter describes useful functions such as how to register Custom Papers and use the remote
desktop function.
Registering Custom Paper
Using the paper settings function of the machine, you can specify the paper type, size, weight and
various other properties of paper that you want to use and register the settings as "Custom Paper". Also,
you can achieve satisfactory printing results easily by specifying the paper settings for a commercially
available paper brand that is widely used from the Master Library.
• The Color Homing function stabilizes color deviations during a print run. For details about the Color
Homing function, see the operating instructions of the function, or contact a Ricoh service
representative.
Overview of Paper Settings
Tray paper settings
You need to specify the paper sizes and types for paper trays in order to properly print on the
paper loaded in the paper trays. You can configure these settings in the tray paper settings.
The machine has functions such as a master library and custom paper settings that make it easy to
configure the tray paper settings.
You can specify the tray paper settings in the following ways:
• Assign a custom paper to a paper tray
• Manually specify a paper size and type for a paper tray
Master library
The master library contains settings such as paper types, paper weights, and machine operating
conditions (for example, paper feed, toner transfer, and toner fusing conditions) that are
customized for each major commercially available paper products and also for each major paper
types.
To use the settings in the master library, you must first select the name or type of your paper from
the master library. The paper settings will be registered to a custom paper. The master library
makes it easy to get the best results from your paper.
Custom paper
You can register each type of paper that you use as a "Custom Paper" by setting a name, size,
type, weight, and other advanced settings in "Tray Paper Settings".
17
3. Useful Functions
This function is convenient because you can register certain types of paper that you often use as
custom paper.
"Custom Paper" can also be set from the master library.
The machine automatically synchronizes the custom paper settings with the media catalog
information on the color controller when using the color controller.
Custom papers can be registered in the following ways:
• Select the paper's name or type from the master library
• Modify a custom paper that has already been registered
• Manually specify the paper's type and weight
Under the custom paper's advanced settings, you can specify the machine operating conditions
such as paper feed, toner transfer, and toner fusing conditions. The master library contains the
advanced settings that are preconfigured so that you do not need to configure them.
When you change the paper's settings such as the type and weight of the custom paper you
register, the paper's advanced settings are initialized.
Only the machine administrator can change the advanced settings. For details, contact your
machine administrator.
Saves all types of registered custom paper to an SD card at one time.
Saved custom papers can be restored and used as a custom paper again.
18
Registering Custom Paper
Relationships between functions
Color
controller
Machine
Master Library
- Paper Type
- Paper Weight
- Paper Size
- Other settings
1
4
SD card
7
2
Media catalog
information
- Paper Type
- Paper Weight
- Paper Size
- Other settings
Custom Paper
3
5
1
6
Tray Paper Settings
8
Paper tray information
DWP182
1. You can import paper settings from the Master Library and register it as custom paper.
2. You can export all types of custom paper to an SD card at one time.
3. You can import and register the custom paper that you have exported to an SD card.
4. You can register custom paper by manually specifying its settings such as the type and weight you
want to use.
5. You can configure the tray paper settings by assigning a custom paper to each paper tray.
6. You can configure paper settings such as sizes and types manually for each tray.
7. The machine automatically synchronizes the custom paper settings on the machine with the media
catalog information on the color controller when using the color controller.
8. The machine automatically synchronizes the tray paper settings on the machine and the paper tray
information on the color controller when using the color controller.
• Only the device administrator can configure [Advanced Settings] for a custom paper.
• For details about the recommended paper for use with this machine, see page 129
"Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
• For details about the media catalog information, see the manual provided with the color controller.
19
3. Useful Functions
Custom Paper Registration Workflow
Step
1
Using the Master Library
Select paper in the Master Library, and
register it as custom paper
• See page 24 "Selecting paper to
import from the Master Library or SD
Card"
• See page 25 "Registering a paper
whose paper name is not displayed in
the Master Library"
2
Not using the Master Library
Register paper as custom paper by
specifying a paper type, weight and other
settings as you want
• See page 25 "Registering a paper
whose paper name is not displayed in
the Master Library"
Select the registered custom paper in the "Tray Paper Settings" for the paper tray
• See page 152 "Specifying a Custom Paper"
• When using the registered custom paper, see page 152 "Specifying a Custom Paper".
• When specifying the paper size and type individually and not using the custom paper, see
page 153 "Manually specifying a paper's size and type".
How to Use the [Custom Paper Management] Screen
This section explains the items on the [Custom Paper Management] screen.
This screen appears when you press [CustomPaper Management] on the [Tray Paper Settings] screen.
20
Registering Custom Paper
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DWP153
1. [Search]
Press [Search] to search for papers in the list of custom papers. Press [Search] again to return to the list of
custom papers from the search result. For details, see page 41 "Searching for a Paper by Specifying the
Conditions".
2. [Add New]
Press this key to register a new type of custom paper. For details, see page 24 "Registering a Custom
Paper".
3. [Delete]
Press this key to delete the selected custom paper from the list. For details, see page 43 "Deleting a Custom
Paper".
4. [Paper Identification]
Scans the paper using the Media Identification Unit, and searches for a type of paper with the closest settings
from the registered custom paper.
For details, see page 29 "Registering a Custom Paper with the Media Identification Unit".
5. Item name
Displays an item name in the custom paper list. The items to be displayed can be selected from the following:
• [No.] (fixed item)
• [Paper Name] (fixed item)
• [Paper Brand] (initial display)
• [Paper Size] (initial display)
• [Paper Weight] (initial display)
• [Manufacturer]
• [Paper Thickness]
• [Paper Type]
• [Paper Color]
21
3. Useful Functions
• [Coated Paper Type]
• [Prepunched]
• [Textured]
• You can specify whether or not to display each item except [No.] and [Paper Name].
• You can sort the custom paper list by pressing each item name.
• To select an item to display on the custom paper list, press the list icon (
) to display the [Select
Item Displayed/Arrange Order] screen, and then select the item by selecting the check box. You
can also change the display order by dragging the item on the screen.
6. [Import]
Press this key to import custom paper from the Master Library or SD card. For details, see page 24
"Selecting paper to import from the Master Library or SD Card".
7. [Export]
Press this key to export all types of custom paper to an SD card.
For details, see page 42 "Exporting Custom Paper to an SD Card".
8. [Print the Settings]
Press this key to print the parameters of the custom paper settings. For details, see page 42 "Printing the
Parameters of Custom Paper Settings".
9. [Jump to Row]
Press this key to scroll down the list of custom paper to the specified line. You can specify the number in
increments of 100.
10. List of custom papers
The list of registered custom papers is displayed.
A custom paper that is assigned to a paper tray is indicated by the icon
assigned to more than one trays is indicated by the icon .
, and a custom paper that is
Also, one of the following icons is displayed next to [No.]:
: A custom paper that is created as new
: A custom paper that is registered from the Master Library
: A custom paper that is registered from the Master Library and then modified
How to Use the [Import From Master Library] Screen
This section explains the items on the [Import From Master Library] screen.
This screen is displayed when you press [Import] on the [Custom Paper Management] screen, and then
select [From Master Library].
22
Registering Custom Paper
1
2
3
4
5
6
DWP154
1. [Search]
Press [Search] to search the papers in the paper list. Press [Search] again to return to the list of custom papers
from the search result. For details, see page 41 "Searching for a Paper by Specifying the Conditions".
2. [Paper Identification]
Scans paper with the Media Identification Unit, and then searches the master library for a custom paper with
settings that are similar to those of the scanned paper. For details, see page 29 "Registering a Custom Paper
with the Media Identification Unit".
3. Item name
Displays the item names in the Master Library list. The items specified in the "Custom Paper Management"
screen are displayed.
Also, you can sort the Master Library list by each displayed item. Press the item to be used for the sorting.
4. [Import]
Select an item in the Master Library list, and press [Import] to import the selected paper as custom paper. For
details, see page 24 "Selecting paper to import from the Master Library or SD Card" and page 25
"Registering a paper whose paper name is not displayed in the Master Library".
5. [Jump to Row]
Press this key to scroll down the Master Library list to the specified line. You can specify the number in
increments of 100.
6. List of papers in the library
The list of all types of custom paper registered in the Master Library is displayed.
• The contents in the master library on your machine might differ slightly from those shown in the
illustrations in this manual.
23
3. Useful Functions
Registering a Custom Paper
You can register up to 1000 custom papers.
Check the product name, size, and type of your paper before registering it.
Check that the size and type of your paper are compatible with the paper tray that you want to use. Tray
compatibility depends on the paper's size and type. For details about the paper sizes and types that can
be used, see page 129 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
• When the number of registered custom papers reaches the maximum, you will not be able to
register a new custom paper. Delete any unnecessary custom papers from the list, and then try
registering again. For details, see page 43 "Deleting a Custom Paper".
Selecting paper to import from the Master Library or SD Card
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
To import data from an SD card, insert the SD card into the media.
For details about using an SD card, see "Inserting an SD Card", Preparation.
3. Press [Import].
4. Select [From Master Library] or [From SD Card].
5. Select the name of the paper that you want to register.
Select an item by selecting its check box.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
You can select two or more types of paper.
6. Press [Import].
7. Press [OK].
24
Registering Custom Paper
8. Press [Exit].
9. Press
.
10. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• You can check and change the settings of the registered custom paper such as the paper size
setting on the [Custom Paper Management] screen. For details about modifying the custom paper,
see page 34 "Modifying a Custom Paper".
Registering a paper whose paper name is not displayed in the Master Library
If the paper you want is not in the library's paper list or you don't know the name of the paper, use the
following procedures:
• Selecting the paper's type from the master library
The master library contains the optimum printing conditions not only for each commercially
available paper but also for each type of paper.
Even if you don't know the brand name of a paper, you can register the paper as the custom paper
by selecting a paper of the matching paper type and weight from the Master Library.
• Manually specifying a paper's type and weight
You can register a custom paper by manually specifying its type and weight.
Selecting the paper's type from the master library
You can select the type of paper from the master library and register it as a custom paper.
• Specify [Paper Type] and [Paper Weight] as the items to be displayed in the Custom Paper
Management screen. For details about selecting the displayed items, see page 20 "How to
Use the [Custom Paper Management] Screen".
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Press [Import].
4. Select [From Master Library].
5. Select the most appropriate combination of type and weight for your paper.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the
screen until the desired item is displayed.
25
3. Useful Functions
6. Press [Import].
7. Press [OK].
8. Press [Exit].
When selected, custom paper is imported from the Master Library.
9. Press
.
10. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• You can check and change the settings of the registered custom paper such as the paper
name setting on the [Custom Paper Management] screen. For details about modifying the
custom paper, see page 34 "Modifying a Custom Paper".
Manually specifying a paper's type and weight
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Press [Add New].
4. Press [Paper Name].
5. Enter the name of the paper.
You can enter up to 38 half-width characters. Different Custom Papers can be registered
under the same name.
26
Registering Custom Paper
6. Press [Paper Size].
7. Select a paper size.
8. Press [Paper Weight].
9. Specify the paper's weight.
You can also specify [Paper Thickness].
10. Press [Paper Type].
11. Specify the paper type.
12. Specify other items, such as [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Prepunched],
[Textured], [Apply Duplex], and [Apply Auto Paper Select] as necessary.
13. Press [Save Paper].
The [Save Custom Paper] screen is displayed.
If you change [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color],
[Prepunched], or [Textured] and press [OK], a message appears to notify you that [Advanced
Settings] will be initialized. To apply the changes for those settings, select [Change]. To cancel
the changes, select [Do not Change].
14. Press [Save].
15. Press [Program].
16. Press [Exit].
Custom paper is saved under the smallest unregistered number.
17. Press
.
18. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• If you want to use glossy paper, select [Coated: Glossy] or [Coated: High Gloss] for [Coated
Paper Type]. If you want to use matte paper (including silk, dull, and satin paper), select
[Coated: Matte] for [Coated Paper Type].
• For details about custom paper settings, see page 35 "Custom Paper Settings".
• For details about [Advanced Settings], contact your machine administrator.
Registering a new custom paper by modifying an existing paper
You can open and modify the settings of a registered custom paper and register them as a new custom
paper.
This function is useful when registering paper that is the same type as an existing paper, but a different
size.
Depending on which settings you modify, details of a newly registered custom paper will be as follows:
27
3. Useful Functions
• When the settings of the selected custom paper are not changed:
All settings of the selected custom paper ([Paper Name], [Paper Size], [Paper Weight], and [Paper
Type], including the attributes specific to the color controller) are copied to the newly registered
custom paper.
• When the settings [Paper Name], [Paper Size], [Paper Thickness], [Apply Duplex], [Apply Auto
Paper Select], or [Advanced Settings] of the selected custom paper are changed:
The changes are applied to the newly registered custom paper.
• When the settings [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color],
[Prepunched], or [Textured] of the selected custom paper are changed:
The changes are applied to the newly registered custom paper and its advanced settings are reset
to their default values according to the changes that are applied to the settings.
When modifying a custom paper that is registered from the master library, you can change its [Paper
Name], [Paper Size], [Apply Duplex], and [Apply Auto Paper Select] settings. You can also confirm the
brand name and the version of data from [Paper Brand].
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select a type of custom paper to refer to.
4. Press
.
5. Change the settings for custom paper (such as paper's name, size, and type), as
necessary.
6. Press [Save Paper].
If you change [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Prepunched],
or [Textured] and press [Save Paper], a message appears to notify you that [Advanced Settings]
will be initialized. To apply the changes for those settings, select [Change]. To cancel the changes,
select [Do not Change].
7. Press [Add New].
28
Registering Custom Paper
8. Select a number that is labeled as "Not Programmed".
• Custom paper overwrites the existing item if you select the existing custom paper.
9. Press [Save].
10. Press [Program].
11. Press [Exit].
12. Press
.
13. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• For details about custom paper settings, see page 35 "Custom Paper Settings".
• For details about [Advanced Settings], contact your machine administrator.
Registering a Custom Paper with the Media Identification Unit
When you scan paper with the Media Identification Unit, the Media Identification Unit searches custom
paper in the master library. When custom paper with configurations that are similar to those of the
scanned paper is found, it is displayed.
Part names and functions of the Media Identification Unit
4
1
2
3
DFZ012
1. Power lamp
Lights up when a USB cable is connected and the Media Identification Unit is ready to start scanning paper.
2. Scanning lamp
Lights up when paper is inserted into the scanning area.
29
3. Useful Functions
After the paper is removed, it flashes while paper is being scanned.
3. Error lamp
Lights up when an error occurs.
4. Paper scanning area
Insert the paper you want to scan here.
Connect the Media Identification Unit
1. Connect the USB cable to the USB host interface on the back of the machine.
• USB host interface
DWS305
How to register paper scanned by the Media Identification Unit as custom paper
Registering a paper from the master library with the Media Identification Unit
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Press [Import].
4. Select [From Master Library].
5. Press [Paper Identification].
30
Registering Custom Paper
6. Insert paper into the Media Identification Unit, and then remove it.
Hold the edges of the paper with both hands when inserting the paper.
Keep the paper flat as you pull it out.
DFZ009
The list of custom paper whose configurations are similar to those of the scanned paper
appears.
7. Select the custom paper you want to use, and then press [Import].
8. Press [OK].
9. Press [Exit].
The selected custom paper is imported from the Master Library.
10. Press
.
11. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• The list displayed in Step 6 includes custom paper with configurations whose match rates are
80% or higher.
• You can check and change the settings of the registered custom paper such as the paper size
setting on the [Custom Paper Management] screen. For details about modifying the custom
paper, see page 34 "Modifying a Custom Paper".
Registering a new custom paper with the Media Identification Unit
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Press [Add New].
4. Press [Scan the Value].
5. Insert paper into the Media Identification Unit, and then remove it.
Hold the edges of the paper with both hands when inserting the paper.
Keep the paper flat as you pull it out.
31
3. Useful Functions
DFZ009
6. Change the settings for custom paper (such as paper's name, size, and type), as
necessary.
7. Press [Save Paper].
If you change [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color],
[Prepunched], or [Textured] and press [Save Paper], a message appears to notify you that
[Advanced Settings] will be initialized. To apply the changes for those settings, select
[Change]. To cancel the changes, select [Do not Change].
8. Press [Add New].
9. Select a number that is labeled as "Not Programmed".
• The custom paper overwrites the existing item if you select an existing custom paper.
10. Press [Save].
11. Press [Program].
12. Press [Exit].
13. Press
.
14. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• When you register and scan custom paper using the Media Identification Unit, following items
are automatically specified:
• Paper weight
• Coated paper other than matte paper
• For details about custom paper settings, see page 35 "Custom Paper Settings".
• For details about [Advanced Settings], contact your machine administrator.
Modifying the registered custom paper settings using the Media Identification Unit
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
32
Registering Custom Paper
3. Select the custom paper whose settings you want to modify.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the
screen until the desired item is displayed.
4. Press
.
5. Press [Scan the Value].
6. Insert paper into the Media Identification Unit, and then remove it.
Hold the edges of the paper with both hands when inserting the paper.
Keep the paper flat as you pull it out.
DFZ009
7. Change the settings.
8. Press [Save Paper].
If you change [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color],
[Prepunched], or [Textured] and press [Save Paper], a message appears to notify you that
[Advanced Settings] will be initialized. To apply the changes for those settings, select
[Change]. To cancel the changes, select [Do not Change].
9. Press [Overwrite].
10. Press
.
11. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• For details about custom paper settings, see page 35 "Custom Paper Settings".
• You cannot modify a custom paper that is assigned to a paper tray. To modify it, cancel the
assignment.
• For details about [Advanced Settings], contact your machine administrator.
Specifying a custom paper for paper trays with the Media Identification Unit
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Select the tray to specify the paper settings.
3. Select [Allocate from Media Catalog].
33
3. Useful Functions
4. Press [Paper Identification].
5. Insert paper into the Media Identification Unit, and then remove it.
Hold the edges of the paper with both hands when inserting the paper.
Keep the paper flat as you pull it out.
DFZ009
The list of custom paper whose configurations are similar to those of the scanned paper
appears.
6. Select the custom paper you want to use, and then press [Allocate to Tray].
7. Press
.
8. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• If you want to change the custom paper settings, press [Edit the Settings] in Step 6.
Modifying a Custom Paper
Before modifying a custom paper, confirm that no one is modifying it on Web Image Monitor or on the
color controller.
You can only change the [Paper Name], [Paper Size], [Apply Duplex], and [Apply Auto Paper Select]
settings for a custom paper that is registered from the master library.
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select the custom paper whose settings you want to modify.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
4. Press
.
5. Change the settings.
34
Registering Custom Paper
6. Press [Save Paper].
If you change [Paper Weight], [Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Prepunched],
or [Textured] and press [Save Paper], a message appears to notify you that [Advanced Settings]
will be initialized. To apply the changes for those settings, select [Change]. To cancel the changes,
select [Do not Change].
7. Press [Overwrite].
8. Press
.
9. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• For details about custom paper settings, see page 35 "Custom Paper Settings".
• You cannot modify a custom paper that is assigned to a paper tray. To modify it, cancel the
assignment.
• For details about [Advanced Settings], contact your machine administrator.
Custom Paper Settings
Paper Brand
Displays brand name and data version of the custom paper registered from the master library.
Brand name and data version is displayed only for the custom paper registered from the master
library.
Manufacturer
Displays the manufacturer's name.
Paper Name
Specify the name of the custom paper using up to 38 characters.
Paper Size
Select the paper's size from the regular sizes or specify a [Custom Size].
You can specify a custom size between 100.0 and 330.2 mm (3.94 and 13.00 inches) vertically,
and between 139.7 and 487.7*1 mm (5.50 and 19.20*1 inches) horizontally.
*1 If the banner sheet tray is installed, the maximum horizontal length of custom size paper is 700.0 mm
(27.55 inches).
Paper Weight
Specify the weight (g/m2) of the custom paper. Specify the paper weight between [Paper Weight
1] and [Paper Weight 9]. For details about the relationship between the paper weight and ream
weight, see page 129 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types". Paper weight can also be
scanned using the Media Identification Unit.
35
3. Useful Functions
Paper Thickness
Specify the thickness (µm) of the custom paper. Paper thickness can also be scanned using the
Media Identification Unit.
Paper Type
Specify the type of the custom paper.
Coated Paper Type
Specify whether or not the custom paper is coated. The type of coating finish (other than matte
paper) can also be scanned using the Media Identification Unit.
Paper Color
Specify the color of the custom paper.
Prepunched
Specify whether or not the custom paper is punched.
Textured
Specify whether or not the custom paper is embossed.
Apply Duplex
Specify whether the duplex function is enabled for the custom paper.
Apply Auto Paper Select
Specify whether the auto paper select function is enabled for the custom paper.
Auto Adjust Image Position
Perform automatic adjustment of the print position on the front side or both sides of white custom
paper allocated to the tray. Use the following procedure to perform adjustment:
1. When adjusting the print position on the front side, load 11 sheets of paper in the
tray. Load 31 sheets when adjusting for both sides.
2. Press [Adjustment] for "Front Side Registration" or "Front & Back Registration".
Adjustment is performed by printing 10 sheets for adjusting the front side or 30 sheets for
adjusting the front and back sides, and one sheet for confirming the adjustment result.
3. Check the adjustment result, and press [Apply].
The setting value that reflects the adjustment result is applied.
• To check the print position only, load a sheet of paper in the tray, and then press [Test
Print] under [Test Print (Front)] or [Test Print (Front & Back)].
• To change the number of copies to print, change the value in 0111 Auto Adjust Image
Position: No. of Printed Sheets under [Adjustment Settings for Operators]. The result of
Auto Adjust Image Position may degrade when a value smaller than the default is
specified.
36
Registering Custom Paper
• Adjust the print position using [Manual Adjust Image Position] or [Registration to Align
Front and Back Images Using Template] when adjusting the print position on custom
paper in other than white, or if a satisfactory adjustment result could not be obtained
using [Auto Adjust Image Position]. For details about using [Registration to Align Front
and Back Images Using Template] for adjustment, see page 38 "Adjusting the Image
Position of Either Side of the Paper".
Manual Adjust Image Position
Adjust the print position manually on the custom paper allocated to the tray. For details, see
page 171 "Adjustment Settings for Operators".
Scan the Value
Obtain the paper weight, paper thickness, coating information, and identification data using the
Media Identification Unit.
This item is displayed only when the Media Identification Unit is attached.
Update the Value
Obtain the identification data using the Media Identification Unit.
This item is displayed only when the Media Identification Unit is attached.
Advanced Settings
Specify the advanced settings for the paper.
Only the machine administrator can specify these settings.
Advanced settings can be changed even if the selected custom paper is assigned to a paper tray.
For details, contact your machine administrator.
You can change settings for [Paper Name], [Paper Size], [Apply Duplex], and [Apply Auto Paper
Select] if a custom paper has already been registered using the master library.
Settings that you can change depend on the following:
Custom papers that have been
registered using the master library
(listed with an icon or )
Custom papers that have been
registered by specifying paper
types and weight ( )
Paper Brand
Not Available
-
Manufacturer
Not Available
-
Paper Name
Available
Available
Paper Size
Available
Available
Paper Weight
Not Available
Available
Paper Thickness
Not Available
Available
Settings
37
3. Useful Functions
Custom papers that have been
registered using the master library
(listed with an icon or )
Custom papers that have been
registered by specifying paper
types and weight ( )
Paper Type
Not Available
Available
Coated Paper Type
Not Available
Available
Paper Color
Not Available
Available
Prepunched
Not Available
Available
Textured
Not Available
Available
Apply Duplex
Available
Available
Apply Auto Paper Select
Available
Available
Scan the Value
Available
Not Available
Update the Value
Available
Available
Advanced Settings
Available*1
Available*1
Settings
*1 Can be changed only by the machine administrator.
• Before changing these settings, check that the size and type of your paper are compatible with the
paper tray that you want to load the paper in. Tray compatibility depends on the paper's size and
type.
Adjusting the Image Position of Either Side of the Paper
Adjusts the image position so it is the same on either side of the paper.
First, print a template and measure the length of the specified area. Next, enter the length on the
machine to adjust the position of the image.
Specify the size of each piece of paper you use. Specified settings are saved as custom paper settings,
so that you can use the registered settings next time.
You need administrator privileges to adjust the image position.
Preparations
Before adjusting image positions, perform the following:
• Skew correction with the color controller
38
Registering Custom Paper
First of all, perform skew correction with the color controller. For details, see the manuals for the
color controller.
• Print a template
After performing skew correction, print a template included on the supplied CD-ROM. Select a
template whose size is the same with the paper that includes an image whose position you want to
adjust on the machine.
• Measure the template
When you print the template, arrows are printed in the corners.
Measure the length from the corners of the paper to the peaks of the arrows and from the peaks to
the peaks of the arrows, and then write the length in the box on the template. Perform these for both
sides of the paper.
1
2
DFZ010
1. The length from the peak of one arrow to the peak of another arrow
2. The length from the corner of the paper to the peak of the arrow
Entering the value
When you specify the lengths of the template after measuring them, the values to adjust the image
position are automatically calculated and applied.
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select the name of the paper that you want to register.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
39
3. Useful Functions
4. Press
.
5. Press [Advanced Settings].
6. Enter the login user name and password of the administrator if an authentication screen
appears.
The authentication screen does not appear if you log in as an administrator.
7. Press [Reg Align Frt&Bck Img Use Template].
8. Enter the value you wrote on the printed template.
Enter the measured values in the corresponding fields on the [Side 1] and [Side 2] tabs.
Select the item you want to enter and use the numeric keypad to enter the value.
You can enter values from 0.1 to 999.9 mm in 0.1-mm increments.
9. Press [Apply].
10. Press [Save].
11. Press [Save Paper]
12. Press [Overwrite].
13. Press
.
14. Press the [Home] (
40
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
Registering Custom Paper
• For details about how to register a custom paper, see page 24 "Registering a Custom Paper".
Searching for a Paper by Specifying the Conditions
You can specify search parameters to search for types of paper from the lists of paper types, such as
custom types of paper and the master library.
The following conditions can be specified for paper searches: [No.], [Paper Brand], [Manufacturer],
[Paper Name], [Paper Size (Regular)], [Paper Size (Custom)], [Paper Weight], [Paper Thickness],
[Paper Type], [Coated Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Prepunched], [Textured], [Apply Duplex], and
[Apply Auto Paper Select].
1. Press [Search] on each screen.
2. Press each condition to specify search parameters, and then enter a search string.
To add a search string, press
.
3. Press [Search].
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
41
3. Useful Functions
Printing the Parameters of Custom Paper Settings
You can print the parameters for registered custom paper from the [Custom Paper Management] screen.
You can print 1000 custom paper settings at a time.
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select the custom paper whose settings you want to print.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
4. Press [Print the Settings].
5. Press [Print the Settings].
6. Press
.
7. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
Exporting Custom Paper to an SD Card
You can save all types of registered custom paper to the paper library in an SD card at one time.
Up to 1,000 custom papers can be saved in the library.
Each saved custom paper is assigned a sequential number from 0001. New data overwrites existing
data if both the paper names and paper size settings are the same.
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Insert an SD card into the media slot.
For details about using an SD card, see "Inserting an SD Card", Preparation.
4. Press [Export].
5. Press [OK].
42
Registering Custom Paper
6. Press [Exit].
7. Press
.
8. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
Deleting a Custom Paper
Before deleting a custom paper, confirm that no one is modifying it on Web Image Monitor or on the
color controller.
You can export custom papers to an SD card. For details about backing up custom papers, see page 42
"Exporting Custom Paper to an SD Card".
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [CustomPaper Management].
3. Select the custom paper that you want to delete.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
4. Press [Delete].
5. Press [OK].
6. Press
.
7. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
• You cannot delete a custom paper that is currently assigned to a paper tray.
• You cannot delete a custom paper that is being used with the color controller. For details, see the
manual provided with the color controller.
Managing the Master Library
To update the master library, do the following:
43
3. Useful Functions
To update the master library
Contact your service representative for details.
To copy the data of the paper library in the SD card to another machine of the same model
You can import the paper settings from the database in an SD card.
For details, see page 24 "Selecting paper to import from the Master Library or SD Card".
44
Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel
Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from
the Control Panel
The screen of a computer or DFE connected on a network can be displayed and operated on the
machine's control panel by using the app installed on the machine.
Using the machine's control panel, you can remotely operate a computer or DFE, and perform
operations such as instructing the machine to print.
Connecting to a Computer Remotely
Use the remote desktop client application to connect to a remote computer.
You can connect to an RDP (Remote Desktop Protocol) server that supports RDP Version 8.0
(compatible).
Connecting to a DFE Remotely
Use the DFE connection application to connect to a DFE remotely.
The DFE connection icon is displayed only when a DFE is connected to the machine. Also, the
name of the DFE connection icon varies depending on the type of DFE to be connected.
• You can connect to only one computer or DFE at one time.
• This function cannot be used while you are operating on the screen of the machine's control panel
remotely (see page 50 "Allowing Remote Connection from a PC to the Control Panel").
• Up to six computers and only one DFE can be registered as the destinations.
• Press the Enter key twice to confirm the input text when using Microsoft IME (Roman input) on Fiery
to enter Japanese characters while connecting to Fiery.
Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel
This section describes the procedure for connecting to a computer/DFE remotely from the control panel
of the machine.
Connecting to a Computer Remotely from the Control Panel
1. Press the [Home] (
2. Press
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
.
3. Press the [APPS] tab.
4. Press the [Remote Desktop] icon.
5. Select a destination.
A remote connection starts, and the screen of the computer is displayed on the machine's
control panel.
45
3. Useful Functions
For details about how to create a new destination, see page 46 "Creating a Destination of
Remote Desktop Connection".
6. To end the remote connection, press [Menu] (
) and then press [Disconnect].
Connecting to DFE Remotely from the Control Panel
1. Press the [Home] (
2. Press
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
.
3. Press the [APPS] tab.
4. Press the DFE connection icon.
5. Enter the login information for connecting to the DFE, and then press [Login].
A remote connection starts, and the screen of the DFE is displayed on the machine's control
panel.
Menu Displayed during Remote Connection
During remote connection, you can perform the following functions by pressing [Menu] (
).
Keyboard
Displays a software keyboard.
Select External Keyboard
Select the type of connected keyboard. After replacing the keyboard with another type,
disestablish the remote connection and then establish it again.
Change Login Information
Edit the authentication information. This item is displayed only when the connection destination
is a DFE.
Disconnect
Terminate the remote connection.
• You can also register a remote desktop app or DFE connection app to a function key and start the
app by pressing the function key. For details about the function keys, see page 89 "Changing
Modes by Pressing the Function Keys".
• The current remote connection session continues even when you press [Home] ( ) or other items
and the remote desktop client app move to background. Also, the current remote connection
session continues even after the machine restarts by a system reset.
Creating a Destination of Remote Desktop Connection
To connect from the machine's control panel to a computer (RDP server) remotely, create a destination
for the remote connection by using the following procedure:
46
Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel
Use the following procedure to configure a connection destination.
1. Press the [Home] (
2. Press
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
.
3. Press the [APPS] tab.
4. Press the [Remote Desktop] icon.
5. Press [Add Connection].
Specify the following items:
Host
Label
Specify the name under which to register the destination information.
Host
Specify the host name (IP address) of the destination.
Port
Specify the port number of the destination.
Default: [3389]
Credentials
Username
Enter the login user name.
Password
Enter the login password.
Domain
Enter the domain name.
Settings
Screen
• Colors
Specify the display color of the screen. You can select from the following:
• High Color (16 Bit)
• True Color (24 Bit)
• Highest Quality (32 Bit)
Default: [Highest Quality (32 Bit)]
Advanced
• Enable Gateway
Specify whether or not to use the gateway.
47
3. Useful Functions
Default: [OFF]
• Gateway Settings
You can configure this setting if [Enable Gateway] is set to [ON]. You can specify
the following items:
• Host
Enter the host name.
• Port
Enter the port number.
Default: [443]
• Username
Enter the user name.
• Password
Enter the password.
• Domain
Enter the domain name.
• Security
Specify the encryption setting.
• Automatic
• RDP
• TLS
• NLA
Default: [Automatic]
6. Press [Return] (
) at the bottom center of the screen.
7. Press [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
The settings are saved as a new destination.
8. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
Configuring the Connection App
This section explains the setting items of the remote desktop client app and DFE connection app.
The configured settings are shared by the remote desktop client app and DFE connection app.
Configure the Connection App using the following procedure.
1. Press the [Home] (
2. Press
48
.
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
Connecting to a Computer/DFE Remotely from the Control Panel
3. Press the [APPS] tab.
4. Press the [Remote Desktop] icon.
5. Press [Menu] (
).
6. Press [Settings].
The configuration screen is displayed.
Security
Accept all Certificates
Specify whether or not to accept all certifications.
Default: [OFF]
Clear Certificate Cache
Clears the certificate cache.
7. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
49
3. Useful Functions
Allowing Remote Connection from a PC to the
Control Panel
You can monitor the control panel screen or operate the machine remotely from a Web browser running
on a computer that is connected to the same network. You can also turn off or lock the screen to prevent
unintended operations of the machine.
To allow a remote connection to the control panel, enable [Remote Panel Operation] from the User
Tools screen of the machine.
• Only the device administrator can configure the remote connection to the control panel.
• You cannot use the function while using a remote desktop app or DFE connection app.
Allowing Remote Operations
The Remote Operation/Monitoring request dialog box appears when the administrator requests remote
operation or monitoring of the machine while a user operates the machine. Specify how to respond to a
connection request from the following, depending on the operational situation.
• To deny remote operations or monitoring by the administrator:
Press [Prohibit].
• To allow the administrator to only monitor the screen of the machine:
Press [Allow Monitoring].
• To allow the administrator to remotely operate the machine remotely:
Press [Allow Remote Operation].
When remote operation starts, the status of the remote operation is displayed in the bottom-right area of
the control panel screen.
• The message displayed on the Remote Operation/Monitoring request dialog box varies
depending on the request content submitted by the administrator.
• If no item is pressed within 30 seconds after the Remote Operation/Monitoring request dialog box
has appeared, the remote operation or monitoring starts automatically.
• The Remote Operation/Monitoring request dialog box does not appear when no operation is
performed on the machine for more than 180 seconds.
• The following functions are not enabled when a remote operation or monitoring connection is
established:
• Power Saving Function
50
Allowing Remote Connection from a PC to the Control Panel
• System Reset Timer
• The administrator is disconnected from the machine if any of the following occurs while the
connection is active:
• Any remote operation is not performed on the machine by the administrator for the duration
specified in [Set Remote Connection Timeout]*1
• The machine is turned off
• The control panel is being restarted
• The administrator can view the screen of the machine remotely while a connection is active. To view
a screen containing information that the administrator does not want you to see, such as an ID,
password, or other confidential information, terminate remote operation.
*1 The default of [Timeout (min.)] is 30 minutes. For details about the settings, see page 51 "Enabling the
Remote Connection to the Control Panel".
Terminating a Remote Operation
A remote operation can be terminated by the following procedure:
1. Tap [Admin. is operating remotely] or [Deny admin.'s operation, tap here] displayed in
the bottom-right area of the control panel screen.
The system message dialog box is displayed.
2. Press [Disconnect].
The end message is displayed, and the remote operation is terminated.
• A remote operation may be terminated by the administrator.
• When an operation on the machine screen is locked, any remote operation cannot be terminated
by operating the machine screen.
Enabling the Remote Connection to the Control Panel
• If the items "Remote Operation/Monitoring Functions" and password setting are not displayed,
consult your sales or service representative.
1. Press the [Home] (
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
2. Press the [User Tools] (
) icon in the Home screen.
3. Press [Basic Settings for Extended Devices].
4. Press [Remote Panel Operation].
5. Set [Remote Operation/Monitoring Functions] to [ON].
51
3. Useful Functions
6. Configure other items as necessary.
Remote Operation/Monitoring Functions
Specify whether or not to enable the remote operation and monitoring functions.
Default: [OFF]
Remote Connection URL
The URL (IP address) is displayed when Remote Panel Operation/Monitoring is enabled.
Activate Monitoring Password
Select this check box to enable the password settings of the administrator to connect to the
machine for monitoring.
Set Monitoring Password
Enter the password for monitoring the machine.
You can enter up to 8 half-width characters combining a-z, A-Z and 0-9.
You cannot monitor the machine unless specifying the password.
Activate Remote Operation Password
Select this check box to enable the password settings of the administrator to connect to the
machine for remote operations.
Set Remote Operation Password
Enter the password for operating the machine remotely.
You can enter up to 8 half-width characters combining a-z, A-Z and 0-9.
You cannot operate the machine remotely unless specifying the password.
Set Remote Connection Timeout
If the administrator establishes a remote connection with the machine but performs no remote
operation for the specified duration, the connection with the administrator will be terminated
automatically. Specify a value between 3 and 60 minutes.
Default: [30 minutes]
7. Press the [Home] (
52
) icon at the center bottom of the screen.
4. Getting Started
This chapter describes preparations for using the machine and operating instructions.
Guide to Names and Functions of Components
• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so risks fire caused by overheated internal
components.
Front and left view
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
9
DWQ001
1. Main power switch
To operate the machine, the main power switch must be on. If it is off, open the main power switch's cover and
turn the switch on.
2. Left mainframe front cover
Open to remove paper jams or turn on/off the AC power switch.
53
4. Getting Started
3. Control panel
See page 76 "Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel".
4. AC power switch
Press to completely turn off the power of the machine. The AC power switch must be kept on in normal use.
The switch is inside the left mainframe front cover. For details, see page 297 "Dos and Don'ts".
5. Toner cartridge compartment
Install toner cartridges here.
Open the cover to replace toner cartridges.
6. Right mainframe front cover
Open to remove paper jams.
7. Paper trays (Trays 1–2)
Load paper here.
8. The anti-humidity heater of the transfer unit
Warm the machine's interior to maintain the proper humidity. These heaters keep the machine warm even if the
main power switch is turned off.
9. Waste toner cartridge cover
Open to replace the waste toner bottle.
54
Guide to Names and Functions of Components
Front and right view
1
DWQ002
1. Attention light
See page 56 "Guide to Functions of the Attention Light".
55
4. Getting Started
Rear and right view
1
1
1
1
2
1
DWQ200
1. Vents
Prevent overheating.
2. Earth leakage breaker
Protects users from electric shock. For details about checking the earth leakage breaker, see page 320
"Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers".
Guide to Functions of the Attention Light
• Do not push or pull the attention light when installed to the machine. Doing so may result in
damage or malfunction of the attention light or the machine.
56
Guide to Names and Functions of Components
CUV121
The attention light notifies the user by light when there is a paper jam or no paper is left.
The colors of the lamp and their meanings are as follows:
Lamp
Status
The bottom lamp lights blue.
Printing
The bottom lamp flashes blue.
Data in
The top lamp lights red.
Error occurred
(Example)
• When the service call message appears
• Paper jam
• Out of paper
• Out of toner
• Memory overflow
• Waste toner bottle full
Read the message on the display panel, and then
take appropriate action. For details, see
page 268 "When Messages Appear".
57
4. Getting Started
Lamp
The top lamp flashes yellow.
Status
Warning
(Example)
• Toner has nearly run out.
• Waste toner bottle is nearly full.
Read the message on the display panel, and then
take appropriate action. For details, see
page 268 "When Messages Appear".
58
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
Guide to Functions of the Machine's External Options
1
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
4
14
13
15
5
6
7
16
17
18
19
18
20
EDD101
1. Booklet Finisher SR5120
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher shift tray 1
• Finisher shift tray 2
• Finisher booklet tray
Prints can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
Depending on when the machine was bought, this option may not be available. For details, contact your
service representative.
2. Trimmer unit TR5050
Cuts the fore edge of the book block after the book block is saddle stitched.
Booklet Finisher SR5120 is required in order to attach this.
59
4. Getting Started
Depending on when the machine was bought, this option may not be available. For details, contact your
service representative.
3. Finisher SR5110
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher shift tray 1
• Finisher shift tray 2
Prints can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
Depending on when the machine was bought, this option may not be available. For details, contact your
service representative.
4. Booklet Finisher SR5060
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle stitch function can staple multiple sheets of
paper in the center and fold them into booklets. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
• Finisher booklet tray
Prints can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
5. Trimmer unit TR5040
Cuts the fore edge of the book block after the book block is saddle stitched.
Booklet Finisher SR5060 is required in order to attach this.
6. Finisher SR5050
Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher upper tray
• Finisher shift tray
Prints can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
7. SR5000 series output tray for banner sheet
Allows you to output paper that has a horizontal length of 487.8 mm (19.21 inches) or longer on Finisher
SR5050/SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5060/SR5120.
8. High capacity stacker
Consists of the following paper trays:
• Stacker upper tray
• Stacker tray
The stacker upper tray can hold up to 250 sheets of paper, and stacker tray can hold up to 5,000 sheets of
paper. You can connect up to two high capacity stackers.
9. Ring binder
Binds sheets of paper with a ring comb.
10. Multi-folding unit
Applies the following folds: Half Fold, Letter Fold-out, Letter Fold-in, Double Parallel Fold, Gate Fold, and Zfold.
60
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
11. Interposer CI5040
Inserts cover or slip sheets into printed paper. By attaching the double-feed detection kit for the interposer, the
machine is configured to detect double feeds from the interposer.
You can attach Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120 together with this.
Depending on when the machine was bought, this option may not be available. For details, contact your
service representative.
12. Perfect binder
Applies adhesive to the spine of gathered pages to bind them in a booklet.
13. Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
Holds up to 500 sheets of paper.
14. Banner sheet tray of multi bypass tray (Tray A)
Allows you to load large-sized paper in the multi bypass tray (Tray A).
15. Multi bypass attachment kit
Attaches the multi bypass tray (Tray A) to the wide LCT.
16. Interposer CI5030
Inserts cover or slip sheets into printed paper.
You can attach Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060 together with this.
17. Interface box
Allows you to connect extended options to the machine.
18. Wide LCT
Holds up to 4,800 sheets of paper. You can load paper whose sizes are up to SRA3 or 13 × 191/5. You can
connect up to three wide LCTs.
19. Bridge unit of wide LCT
Connects a wide LCT to an additional wide LCT.
20. Banner sheet tray of wide LCT
Allows you to load large-sized paper in the wide LCT.
• You cannot install multiple finishers simultaneously.
• If you have connected two high capacity stackers, you cannot install the multi-folding unit, the ring
binder, or the perfect binder.
• You cannot attach the banner sheet tray of wide LCT and the banner sheet tray of multi bypass tray
(Tray A) simultaneously.
• You can install the multi-folding unit only if either Finisher SR5050/SR5110 or Booklet Finisher
SR5060/SR5120 is installed.
• You can install the ring binder or the perfect binder only if one of the following options is installed:
Finisher SR5050/SR5110, Booklet Finisher SR5060/SR5120, or the high capacity stacker.
• You cannot install the ring binder and perfect binder simultaneously.
61
4. Getting Started
• Booklet Finisher SR5120, Finisher SR5110, Interposer CI5040, and Trimmer unit TR5050 cannot
be used with the TotalFlow print server.
• The multi bypass tray (Tray A) can be attached only if the wide LCT is installed. However, you can
attach the multi bypass tray (Tray A) to the wide LCT only if the multi bypass attachment kit is
installed.
• When the Ring Binder or Perfect Binder is attached, printing on banner paper (700.1–1260 mm,
27.56–49.61 inches) is not possible. You can specify such paper as a custom size paper on the
control panel, but the machine aborts preparation when printing is performed. If this occurs, cancel
the job.
• Paper is ejected with the print side facing up when printing on banner paper with the banner sheet
tray of multi bypass tray (Tray A) or banner sheet tray of wide LCT attached. The output orientation
specified on the color controller or in the printer driver is ignored.
• When using multiple linked wide LCTs, the multi bypass tray (Tray A) can be attached only to the
wide LCT closest to the machine.
• The banner sheet tray of wide LCT can be attached to the following trays:
• When using a single wide LCT: Tray 3
• When using 2 linked wide LCTs: Tray 5
• When using 3 linked wide LCTs: Tray 7
Precautions for using the finisher
• The stapler may eject unfolded staples. Be careful not to prick your fingers.
• Do not hit the finisher (for instance, do not hit the surface of the finisher repeatedly to arrange stacks
of paper neatly).
• Remove printouts from the finisher by lifting them straightforwardly from the left side. If you remove
printouts at an angle or towards the front, the shift tray may rise and catch them.
• Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060
• Finisher Shift Tray
DER121
62
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
• Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120
• Finisher Shift Tray 1 or 2
ECQ003
Removing prints from Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060 during printing
This section describes how to suspend a print job when using Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher
SR5060.
Depending on the image you are printing, prints might not stack properly. If this happens, suspend the
job, remove the prints and then restart the job.
1. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key.
1
DER120
1. [Suspend / Resume] key
63
4. Getting Started
2. Remove the stack of paper from the finisher shift tray.
DER121
3. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key to restart the print.
• You can suspend printing only when the finisher shift tray is selected as the output tray.
Removing prints from Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120 during printing or
when in standby state
• Notes on removing paper from the shift tray
When removing the paper delivered to the shift tray, if you remove the paper at an angle or
towards the front of the machine, the shift tray may rise and catch on the paper. Press the
[Suspend / Resume] key before removing the paper.
• Removing paper during printing
When delivering paper to the shift tray with Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120, the
paper may be misaligned depending on the type of printed image. If this happens, suspend
printing, remove the paper, and then resume printing.
If delivered to finisher shift tray 1
1. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key of finisher shift tray 1.
1
2
EAQ128
1. [Suspend / Resume] key
64
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
2. [Remove Paper] key
2. Press the [Remove Paper] key.
3. After the tray is lowered, remove the delivered paper.
EAQ129
4. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key to restart the print.
If delivered to finisher shift tray 2
1. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key of finisher shift tray 2.
1
EAQ126
1. [Suspend / Resume] key
2. Remove the stack of paper from the finisher shift tray 2.
EAQ127
65
4. Getting Started
3. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key to restart the print.
When using the Z-fold function
To use the Z-fold function, you must attach the Z-fold support tray.
Finisher SR5050 and Booklet Finisher SR5060
• Finisher shift tray
Attach the Z-fold support tray by inserting the two protrusions on its underside into the holes
on the finisher shift tray.
CWR001
Finisher SR5110 and Booklet Finisher SR5120
• Finisher shift tray 1 or 2
Attach the Z-fold support tray by inserting the two protrusions on its underside into the holes
on the finisher shift tray 1 or 2.
EAQ130
If you set [Finisher Output Tray Setting] to [Auto Change] and [Do not Stack Jobs], and
change where to deliver the paper when the Z-fold support tray is attached, multiple jobs may
be delivered to and stacked on the same tray.
66
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
Multi-folding unit
1. Lift up and slide the Z-fold support tray for multi-folding unit to the right, and then set
it in place.
CWR002
When you have finished using the Z-fold support tray for multi-folding unit, lift it up and slide
the tray to the left, and then lower it.
CWR003
When using the Letter Fold-out function
To use the Letter Fold-out function and the Multi-sheet Fold function at the same time, install the Z-fold
support tray for multi-folding unit and the output holding unit for letter fold-out.
2
1
CWR007
67
4. Getting Started
1. Z-fold support tray for multi-folding unit
2. Output holding unit for letter fold-out
1. Lift up and slide the Z-fold support tray for multi-folding unit to the right, and then set it in
place.
CWR002
2. Pull out the output holding unit for letter fold-out.
CWR008
When you have finished using the Z-fold support tray for multi-folding unit and the output holding
unit for letter fold-out, return each to their previous positions.
CWR009
68
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
When ejecting an envelope of 240 × 332 mm to the finisher
When sending an envelope of 240 × 332 mm to the finisher, attach the Z-fold support tray to the
finisher shift tray.
1. Attach the Z-fold support tray by inserting the two protrusions on its underside into the
holes on the finisher shift tray.
Finisher SR5050 and Booklet Finisher SR5060
• Finisher shift tray
CWR001
Finisher SR5110 and Booklet Finisher SR5120
• Finisher shift tray 1 or 2
EAQ130
If you set [Finisher Output Tray Setting] to [Auto Change] and [Do not Stack Jobs], and
change where to deliver the paper when the Z-fold support tray is attached, multiple jobs may
be delivered to and stacked on the same tray.
• Prints may not stack properly when the Z-fold tray is attached.
69
4. Getting Started
When ejecting thin paper to Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120
When ejecting plain paper of length 420.1 mm or more and weighing 64 g/m2 or less to Finisher
SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120, attach the supplied thin paper support tray.
1. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key on Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120, and
then remove the delivered paper.
See page 64 "Removing prints from Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120 during printing
or when in standby state".
2. Pull out the extension tray on the finisher shift tray 1 or 2.
EAQ138
3. Attach the thin paper support tray by fitting its protrusions in the slots on the finisher.
CDN026
4. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key to resume printing.
When ejecting carbonless paper weighing 63 g/m2 or less to Finisher SR5110 or
Booklet Finisher SR5120
When printing on carbonless paper weighing 63 g/m2 or less, set the banner support tray that is
provided with the finisher on the finisher shift tray.
70
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
1. Press the [Suspend / Resume] key on Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120, and
then remove the delivered paper.
See page 64 "Removing prints from Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120 during printing
or when in standby state".
2. Pull out the extension tray on the finisher shift tray 1 or 2.
EAQ138
3. Attach the banner support tray by inserting the protrusions on its underside into the holes
on the finisher shift tray 1 or 2.
ECQ004
4. Press the [Suspend/Resume] key to resume printing.
• Depending on the brand of the paper being used, the paper may be ejected normally even when
the banner support tray is not attached.
• When the banner support tray is attached, output sheets may not be stacked neatly.
• If you set [Finisher Output Tray Setting] to [Auto Change] and [Do not Stack Jobs], and change
where to deliver the paper when the banner support tray is attached, multiple jobs may be
delivered to and stacked on the same tray.
71
4. Getting Started
When ejecting banner sheets to Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120
When printing on banner sheets, attach an SR5000 series output tray for banner sheet to Finisher Shift
Tray 1 or 2. For details about attaching an SR5000 series output tray for banner sheet, contact your
service representative.
Also set the banner support tray. For details about how to attach the banner support tray, see page 70
"When ejecting carbonless paper weighing 63 g/m2 or less to Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher
SR5120".
When ejecting a large number of booklets to finisher booklet tray
When ejecting a large number of booklets to Booklet Finisher SR5060/SR5120, fold the booklet
finisher tray under as shown.
DTY001
• The finisher booklet tray can be folded in two angles.
• The approximate number of copies that can be ejected when the finisher booklet tray is not folded
is as follows:
• When binding 2–5 sheets: 45 copies
• When binding 6–10 sheets: 23 copies
• When binding 11–15 sheets: 15 copies
• When binding 16–20 sheets: 10 copies
• When binding 21–30 sheets: 5 copies
When using the staple function on thin coated paper weighing 80 g/m2 or less
When using the staple function on thin coated paper weighing 80 g/m2 or less, attach the two paper
strengthening ribs to the staple tray.
The paper strengthening ribs are not supplied. To use the paper strengthening ribs, contact the service
representative.
72
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
• When using the staple function on paper other than thin coated paper weighing 80 g/m2 or less,
remove the paper strengthening ribs, and then set [Staple Tray: Rib Installed Mode to Strengthen
Paper] in [Adjustment Settings for Operators] to [Off].
• Attach the paper strengthening ribs also if paper jam occurs inside the staple tray.
1. Open the finisher front cover.
2. Holding the Rb12 handle, pull out the staple unit.
3. Holding the paper strengthening rib horizontally, insert it into the area as shown.
EDB105
4. Rotate the paper strengthening rib to a vertical orientation.
EDB106
73
4. Getting Started
5. Insert the protrusions (2 parts) of the paper strengthening rib into the holes in the staple
tray.
ECQ008
Attach the paper strengthening rib with its cutout facing out.
EDB107
6. Attach the second paper strengthening rib. Repeat Steps 3 to 5.
7. Set [0666 Staple Tray: Rib Installed Mode to Strengthen Paper] in [Adjustment Settings for
Operators] to [On].
When ejecting thick paper or envelopes to the upper tray of the high capacity stacker
Attach the supplied thick paper support tray when ejecting the following paper to the upper tray of the
high capacity stacker:
• Thick paper longer than the length of B4 JIS
• Envelopes that exceed 332 mm (13.1 inches) in length
74
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Options
DWP023
When taking booklets from the trimmer
When taking booklets from the trimmer tray, make sure to wait until the booklet has been completely
delivered to the tray.
If you touch the booklet while it is still being delivered, an error may occur.
Guide to Functions of the Machine's Internal Options/Option Controller
• Color controller
You can print documents using the optional controller. TotalFlow print server or Fiery controller can
be used as the color controller.
75
4. Getting Started
Guide to the Names and Functions of the
Machine's Control Panel
1
2
3 45
6
7
8
9
13
12
11 10
14
15
16
17
DWP109
76
Guide to the Names and Functions of the Machine's Control Panel
1. Display panel
This is a touch panel display that features icons, keys, shortcuts, and widgets that allow you to navigate the
screens of the various functions and applications and provide you with information about operation status and
other messages. See page 86 "How to Use the [Home] Screen".
2. [Check Status] key
Press to check the machine's system status, operational status of each function, and current jobs. You can also
display the job history and the machine's maintenance information.
3. Status indicator
Indicates the status of the system. Stays lit when an error occurs or the toner runs out.
4. [Energy Saver] key
Press to switch to Low Power mode or Sleep mode. When the machine is in Sleep mode, press the key again
to recover the machine from sleep. See page 80 "Saving Energy".
5. Energy saver indicator
When the machine is in Low Power mode, the energy saver indicator is lit. In Sleep mode, the energy saver
indicator flashes slowly.
6. Main power indicator
The main power indicator goes on when you turn on the main power switch.
7. Data In indicator
Flashes when the machine is receiving print jobs from a computer.
8. [ ] key (Enter key)
Press to confirm values entered or items specified.
9. [Start] key
Press to start printing.
10. [Clear] key
Press to delete a number entered.
11. [Stop] key
Press to stop a job in progress, such as printing.
12. Number keys
Use to enter the numbers for copies and data for the selected function.
13. Display adjustment keys
Allows you to adjust the displayed image.
See page 83 "Adjusting the Display".
14. Control panel reset key
Press to restart the control panel. Used when operating from the control panel becomes unresponsive.
15. Media slots
Use to insert an SD card or a USB flash memory device. For details, see "Inserting/Removing a Memory
Storage Device", Preparation.
77
4. Getting Started
16. Media access lamp
Lights up when an SD card is inserted in the media slot.
17. USB Host Interface
Connect a keyboard, mouse, or other USB device.
Adjusting the Angle of the Control Panel
To improve usability, you can adjust the angle of the control panel.
1. Position the control panel at the horizontal angle that you require.
DWQ120
2. Position the control panel at the vertical angle that you require.
DWQ121
78
Turning On/Off the Power
Turning On/Off the Power
Turning On/Off the Power
• Do not repeatedly push the main power switch.
• When you push the main power switch, wait at least 20 seconds after you confirm the main power
indicator has lit up or gone out.
• If the main power indicator does not light up or go out in 15 minutes after you push the main power
switch, contact your service representative.
The main power switch is on the left side of the machine. When this switch is turned on, the main power
turns on and the main power indicator on the right side of the control panel lights up. When this switch is
turned off, the main power turns off and the main power indicator on the right side of the control panel
goes out. When this is done, machine power is off.
This machine uses two power cords. Connect each power plug to separate power sources with
independent breakers.
Confirm how much power the options draw, and then plug them into an outlet that is nearby but
separate from the outlet that the main machine is plugged into.
• This machine automatically enters Fusing Unit Off mode, Low Power mode, or Sleep mode if you
do not use it for a while. For details, see page 80 "Saving Energy".
Turning On the Main Power
1. Make sure the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall outlet.
2. Open the main power switch cover, and then push the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes on.
DWQ005
79
4. Getting Started
• After you switch the main power on, a screen may appear to indicate that the machine is
initializing. Do not switch the power off during this process. Initialization takes about 9
minutes. However, the time for initialization may differ depending on which options are
installed on the machine.
• If the machine does not turn on even if you press the main power switch, open the left
mainframe front cover and make sure that the AC power switch is turned on. For details about
the AC power switch, see page 297 "Dos and Don'ts".
Turning Off the Main Power
• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, always pull the plug, not the cord.
Pulling the cord can damage the power cord. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire
or electric shock.
• Do not turn off the power while the machine is in operation.
• Do not hold down the main power switch while turning off the main power. Doing so forcibly turns
off the machine's power and may damage the hard disk or memory and cause malfunctions.
1. Open the main power switch cover, and then push the main power switch.
The main power indicator goes out. The main power turns off automatically when the machine shuts
down. If the screen on the control panel does not disappear, contact your service representative.
Saving Energy
This machine has the following energy saving functions.
Fusing Unit Off mode
If you do not use the machine for a certain period after an operation, the machine makes a clicking
sound and enters Fusing Unit Off mode.
When the machine is in Fusing Unit Off mode, the display is on but the fusing unit heater is off to
save energy. In this mode, you can change the machine's settings on the control panel. However,
the machine must exit this mode to print.
You can change the amount of time that the machine waits before switching to Fusing Unit Off
mode under [Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy Saving) On/Off]. For details, see "System Settings",
Device Management.
To exit Fusing Unit Off mode, start print jobs.
80
Turning On/Off the Power
The time required to return from Fusing Unit Off mode and resume printing is as long as the time
required for warm-up time. For details about the warm-up time, see "Specifications for the Main
Unit", Specifications.
Low Power mode
If you do not use the machine for a certain period after an operation, the display will turn off and
the machine goes into Low Power mode. The machine uses less electricity in Low Power mode.
You can change the amount of time that the machine waits before switching to Low Power mode
under [Low Power Mode Timer]. For details, see "System Settings", Device Management.
You can change the machine's settings to enter Low Power mode when you press the [Energy
Saver] key. For details, see "System Settings", Device Management.
To exit Low Power mode, do one of the following:
• Pull out the paper trays
• Press the [Check Status] key
Sleep mode
If the machine remains inactive for a specified period or the [Energy Saver] key is pressed, it enters
Sleep mode to further reduce the electricity it consumes. For details, see "System Settings", Device
Management.
When the machine is in Sleep mode, only the [Energy Saver] key and the [Check Status] key are
usable. The machine can print jobs from computers.
You can change the amount of time that the machine waits before switching to Sleep mode under
[Sleep Mode Timer]. For details, see "System Settings", Device Management.
To exit Sleep mode, do one of the following:
• Press the [Energy Saver] key
• Press the [Check Status] key
• When the Color Homing function is enabled, the machine takes more time to recover from Low
Power mode than when the function is disabled. For details about the setting items of the Color
Homing function, see the operating instructions of the Color Homing function.
• When the machine is in Low Power mode, the [Energy Saver] key is lit. In Sleep mode, the [Energy
Saver] key flashes slowly. In Fusing Unit Off mode, the [Energy Saver] key is not lit.
• The energy saving functions will not operate in the following cases:
• When fixed warm-up is in progress
• When operations are suspended during printing
• When a warning message appears (The machine enters Fusing Unit Off mode unless the
cover is open.)
81
4. Getting Started
• When paper is jammed (The machine enters Fusing Unit Off mode except when the cover is
open.)
• When the Data In indicator is lit or flashing
• The machine does not enter Low Power mode or Sleep mode in the following cases:
• During communication with external equipment
• When the hard disk is active
• When the service call message appears
• When the machine's cover is opened
• When the "Add Toner" message appears
• When toner is being replenished
• When one of the following screens is displayed:
• Machine Features
• Counter
• Inquiry
• Address Book Management
• Tray Paper Settings
• When the remote administration service notification screens is displayed.
• When data is being processed
• When the Data In indicator is lit or flashing
• When the internal cooling fan is active
• When accessing the machine using Web Image Monitor
82
Adjusting the Display
Adjusting the Display
You can adjust the color, brightness and display position of the control panel screen using the display
adjustment keys in the bottom right part of the control panel.
To adjust the display and unlock it, press and hold the Up and Down buttons at the same time for five
seconds.
1
2
3
DWP083
1. Mode button
Press this button to start or end display adjustment. This button also selects or deselects the setting item when
you are adjusting the display.
2. Up button
Press this button to move between the setting items, or change the setting value.
The cursor moves to the item above when moving between the items.
The value increases when changing a setting value.
It is also used to enable the display adjustment function.
3. Down button
Press this button to move between the setting items, or change the setting value.
The cursor moves to the item below when moving between the items.
The value decreases when changing a setting value.
It is also used to enable the display adjustment function.
83
4. Getting Started
Display adjustment screen
Setting item
84
Content
Setting range
Initial
value
Contrast
Adjust the overall contrast of all colors in RGB
0-255
55
ContrastRed
Adjust the contrast in red (digital setting)
0-255
50
ContrastGreen
Adjust the contrast in green (digital setting)
0-255
50
ContrastBlue
Adjust the contrast in blue (digital setting)
0-255
50
Filter
Select the spatial filter setting
Non, 0-4
Non
Gamma
Specify the gamma value setting
0.1-3.0
1.0
Backlight
Adjust the brightness
0-31
24
InputSelect
Select an image source to display
DVI/RGB
DVI
OSD HPosition
Adjust the horizontal position to display the
display adjustment screen (OSD)
5-253
128
OSD VPosition
Adjust the vertical position to display the
display adjustment screen (OSD)
63-210
128
OSD Effect
Specify the opacity setting of the display
adjustment screen (OSD)
0-7
0
Adjusting the Display
Setting item
Content
Setting range
Initial
value
Non, 5-60*1
30
OSD Timeout
Specify the time to wait before closing the
display adjustment screen (OSD)
Default
Select to initialize the settings
-
-
Save Data
Select to save the data
-
-
Cancel
Select to cancel selection, or hide the display
adjustment screen (OSD)
-
-
Status
Select to display the status screen
-
-
*1 Select the time from 5-10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 and 60.
85
4. Getting Started
How to Use the [Home] Screen
The [Home] screen is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on.
One icon is assigned to each function, and these icons are displayed on the [Home] screen. You can
add shortcuts to frequently used functions or Web pages to the [Home] screen. Also, you can register
widgets such as the Change Langs. Widget to it. The [Home] screen and the screen of each function may
differ depending on the optional units that are installed.
To display the [Home] screen, press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
• Do not apply strong impact or force to the screen, or it may be damaged. Maximum force
allowable is approx. 30N (approx. 3 kgf). (N = Newton, kgf = Kilogram force. 1 kgf = 9.8N.)
To switch between screens, flick your finger to the right or left on the screen.
1
2
3
4
5
6
16
7
8
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
EDD102
1. Machine status display
Displays the machine status.
2. Job status display
Displays the status of the first job in the job list.
3. Remaining toner icon
Shows the remaining amount of toner.
86
How to Use the [Home] Screen
4. Logged-in user icon
This key is displayed when user authentication is enabled. When you press the icon while [Login] is displayed,
the login screen appears. If you are already logged in to the machine, the logged-in user name is displayed.
Press the icon while you are logged-in to log out from the machine.
For details about how to log in and out, see page 100 "Logging In the Machine".
5. [Help]
Displays help for operating the machine. For details, see page 95 "[Help] Screen".
6. Function keys
For details, see page 89 "Changing Modes by Pressing the Function Keys".
7. Application list icon
Press to display the application list. You can create shortcuts to the applications on the [Home] screen.
To use an application displayed in the [WIDGET] tab and [PROGRAM] tab, create a shortcut for the
application on the [Home] screen. For details, see "Customizing the [Home] Screen", Preparation.
8. Icons to switch between screens
Press to switch between the five home screens. The icons appear at the bottom right and left of the screen, the
number of icons indicates the number of screens on each side of the current screen.
9. [Counter]
Press to display or print the total number of printed sheets. See page 322 "Counter".
10. [Media Information]
/
/
Press to remove the inserted SD card or USB flash memory device from the media slot. For details, see
"Removing an SD Card" or "Removing a USB Flash Memory Device", Preparation.
11. Remote operation message
Displays the connection status when you are connected to the control panel from a computer. For details
about "Remote Panel Operation", see page 50 "Allowing Remote Connection from a PC to the Control Panel".
12. [Menu]
Displays the menu screen of the application you are using. Depending on the application you are using, this
key may be disabled. You can also press this key in the [Home] screen to restore the [Home] screen's settings
to their defaults.
13. [Home]
Press to display the [Home] screen.
14. [Return]
Press this key to return to the previous screen while Screen Features are enabled or applications are used.
Depending on the application you are using, this key may be disabled. You can specify whether this key is
enabled or not in some applications. For details about the settings, see "Screen Features", Device
Management.
15. System message
Displays messages from the machine system and applications.
87
4. Getting Started
16. Icon display area
Displays the function or application icons and widgets. Displayed icons differ between the five home screens.
For details about icons on each screen, see page 88 "Main Icons on the [Home] Screen".
You can also add shortcuts and arrange icons using folders. For details, see "Customizing the [Home]
Screen", Preparation.
• You can change the [Home] screen's wallpaper. For details, see "Changing the [Home] Screen's
Wallpaper", Preparation.
• You can switch modes by pressing icons on the [Home] screen. You can also switch modes by
pressing the function keys.
• You cannot switch modes in any of the following situations:
• When accessing the following screens:
• Machine Features
• Counter
• Inquiry
• Address Book Management
• Current Job / Job History
• The [Home] screen is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on. You can change this
default setting under Function Priority. See "Screen Features", Device Management.
Main Icons on the [Home] Screen
The following icons are displayed on the [Home] screen as a factory default:
Icon
88
Description
User Guide
Press to display the manuals for the machine.
User Tools
Press to display the screen for the machine's initial settings.
Printer Status
Press to display the device information screen. For details, see
page 90 "[Printer Status] Screen".
Tray Paper Settings
Press to display the Tray Paper Settings screen. For details, see
page 91 "[Tray Paper Settings] Screen".
Adjustment Settings for
Operators
Press to display the Adjustment Settings for Operators screen. For
details, see page 171 "Adjustment Settings for Operators".
How to Use the [Home] Screen
You can add icons to the [Home] screen to customize the machine. For details about adding icons to the
[Home] screen, see "Adding Icons to the [Home] Screen", Preparation.
Changing Modes by Pressing the Function Keys
You can switch modes by pressing the function keys on the top of the screen.
1
DWQ103
1. Function Keys
You can use the function keys when [Function Key] in Screen Features is enabled. See "Screen Features",
Device Management.
[Printer Status], [Tray Paper Settings] and [Adjustment Settings for Operators] are fixed items, and cannot be
changed. For detail about each function, see page 90 "[Printer Status] Screen", page 154 "Tray Paper
Settings", and page 171 "Adjustment Settings for Operators".
You can assign frequently used functions to the 6 other keys to the right.
You can register often used functions to the function keys by using the following procedure:
1. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon (
).
3. Press [Screen Features].
4. Press [Screen Device Settings].
5. Press [Function Key Settings].
6. Select the [Function Key] check box.
89
4. Getting Started
7. Select from [Function Key 1]-[Function Key 6] to which you want to assign a function.
8. Press [Allocated Function].
9. Select a function you want to register from the list.
10. Press [Display Name].
11. Enter the function name to display on the key.
12. Press [OK].
13. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
The function key is registered to the top of the screen.
[Printer Status] Screen
Press [Printer Status] among the function keys to display the device information screen.
In the device information screen, you can view the status of the supplies and paper in the main unit and
in each optional unit, and the list of jobs.
3
4
1
2
EDD104
1. Supply / Paper Information
Displays errors prompting to replenish supplies or notifying the waste toner bottle being full, and information
such as the set status and remaining amount of toner. Also displays the settings and remaining amount of
paper in each tray.
2. Job Information
Displays the list of jobs.
90
How to Use the [Home] Screen
3. [Supply Status]
Press [Supply Status] to view the Paper, Maintenance Info, Machine Address Info, and inquiry information.
For details, see "Checking Machine Status and Settings", Preparation.
4. Machine Front View
Shows the machine configuration, the tray used for printing, error status, and other information.
[Tray Paper Settings] Screen
Press [Tray Paper Settings] among the function keys to display the [Tray Paper Settings] screen.
In the [Tray Paper Settings] screen, you can specify the paper settings for the trays and interposer, and
configure the settings for functional papers.
1
2
3
EDD105
1. [Paper Tray] tab
Displays the list that shows the setting details of each tray and interposer.
The icon
indicates the tray that is configured manually or does not support duplex printing.
The icon indicates the tray that is manually configured or excluded from the source of automatic paper
selection.
The [Allocate Paper] screen is displayed when you select a tray. If you select the interposer, the [Interposer
Settings] screen is displayed.
For details about the paper settings for the paper tray, see page 152 "Changing Tray Paper Settings".
91
4. Getting Started
2. The machine front view
Displays information such as the machine configuration, tray used for printing, error status, and other
information.
3. [CustomPaper Management]
Displays the [Custom Paper Management] screen.
For details about the [Custom Paper Management] screen, see page 20 "How to Use the [Custom Paper
Management] Screen".
[Information] Screen
To raise awareness of resource conservation, you can configure the machine to display the reduction in
paper usage.
The color utilization ratio is also displayed on the [Information] screen.
When user authentication is enabled, the screen is displayed when you log in to the machine. When
user authentication is not enabled, the screen is displayed after returning from Sleep mode or after a
system reset. The [Information] screen appears when the power is turned on, regardless of the
authentication settings.
1
2
3
4
5
6
DWP122
1. [Prev.] / [Crnt.]
Press to switch between the [Information] screen of the previous count period and that of the current count
period.
2. Paper Reduction
Shows the amount of paper saved by using the duplex and combine printing functions. The figure indicates the
percentage of paper saved from the total of all the paper used. As the figures become greater, the number of
the trees increases. If the paper reduction ratio exceeds a certain level, the trees will bear fruit.
Press the balloon to display the following items:
• Total Print Pages:
Total number of pages printed in the current count period is displayed.
• 2 sided Utilization:
The ratio of 2-sided prints to the total number of prints is displayed.
92
How to Use the [Home] Screen
The higher the ratio is, the more leaves are displayed.
• Combine Utilization:
The ratio of combined prints to the total number of prints is displayed.
The higher the ratio is, the more leaves are displayed.
3. Color Utilization
The ratio of color prints to the total number of prints is displayed.
4. [Close]
Press this to close the [Information] screen and return to operation.
5. Count periods
The current and previous count periods are displayed.
6. Message
A message from the administrator is displayed.
• Depending on the machine settings, the [Information] screen may not be displayed. For details, see
"Managing Eco-friendly Counter", Security Guide.
• You can also use Web Image Monitor to check the usage status. For details about how to check
them, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• Under [Eco-friendly Counter Period / Administrator Message] in [System Settings], you can check
"Count Period", "Administrator Message", "Display Information Screen", and "Display Time". Only
the administrator can change the settings. For details, see "Managing Eco-friendly Counter",
Security Guide.
[Web Browser] Screen
The machine has a web browser that allows you to view Web pages.
You must first configure the network settings in [Screen Features]. For details about the settings, see
"Screen Features", Device Management.
To start a web browser on the control panel, press
[APPS] tab.
, and then press the [Web Browser] icon on the
93
4. Getting Started
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
DWQ105
1. Tab
Press to switch screens. To display the URL bar, press the tab of the Web page.
2. URL bar
Press this bar to enter the URL of a Web page. You can type the URL of a Web page that you want to display
by pressing the address bar.
3. Menu
Press [Menu] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center to open this menu.
4. [Refresh]/[Stop]
Press to refresh a Web page.
While a Web page is refreshing, [Stop] appears.
5. [Forward]
Press to return to the previous Web page after pressing [Return] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
6. [New tab]
Press to open a new tab.
7. [New incognito tab]
Press to open a new tab that leaves no record in the browser history or search history.
8. [Share page]
Press to share Web pages with other devices.
9. [Find on page]
Press to type a word and search for it on the current Web page.
94
How to Use the [Home] Screen
10. [Request desktop site]
Press to switch the Web page display mode from the mobile version to the desktop version.
11. [Save for offline reading]
Press to save the Web page for offline reading.
12. [Page info]
Press to display the URL or server certificate of the Web page that you are accessing.
13. [Print]
Press to specify the printing conditions such as paper sizes and duplex printing. For details, see "Printing a
Web Page", Preparation.
14. [Save PDF File]
Press to save the PDF file displayed on the browser. You can save the file to an SD card or USB flash memory
device. For detail, see "Saving PDF files downloaded from Web pages", Preparation.
15. [Settings]
Press to specify security settings and other browser settings. For details, see "Browser Settings", Preparation.
• For precautions on accessing external servers using the Web Browser, see "Checking the security
of the browser function", Preparation.
[Help] Screen
The machine is equipped with a help function.
Using the help function, you can refer to information about the machine's functions and how to use the
machine.
Before using the help function
• To see the Help on the control panel, confirm [Enable JavaScript] is checked in the setting
menu of the browser.
• To use the help function, the machine needs to be connected to the Internet.
• Depending on your network environment, you may need to configure proxy settings.
• For details about network settings and proxy settings, see Device Management.
Depending on your language, refer to the English manual.
When you finish the settings, turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
95
4. Getting Started
Using the help function
EDD103
You can display the [Help] screen by pressing the help icon on the upper right of the screen.
Disabling the help function
The help function is enabled as a factory default. To disable the help function, use the following
procedure:
1. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon (
).
3. Press [Screen Features].
4. Press [Screen Device Settings].
5. Press [Support Settings].
6. Press [Help Functions].
The status indication mark switches to off.
7. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
Possible Operations on the Application Screen
This section describes the home screen, and explains the operations that can be performed on the
operation screen of some applications.
• Pinch-in
96
How to Use the [Home] Screen
Place your thumb and forefinger on the screen, and then pinch the fingers together to zoom out the
screen. Double-tapping can also be effective for this operation.
DWP061
• Pinch-out
Place your thumb and forefinger on the screen, and then spread the fingers apart to zoom in the
screen. Double-tapping can also be effective for this operation.
DWP062
• Flick
Flick your finger to the right or left on the screen to switch between screens.
DWP063
• Long tap
Place your finger on the screen and hold it there until the next screen appears. You can display the
menu screen of the application you are using.
97
4. Getting Started
DWP064
• Drag
Slide your finger while pressing the screen. You can move an icon to where you want to place it on
the screen.
DWP065
• While using applications other than any of Standard Application, you may enter text for the
operations explained above.
Changing the Display Language
You can change the language used on the display. English is set as default.
1. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon (
).
3. Press [Screen Features].
4. Press [Language & input].
5. Press [Change Language].
6. Select the language you want to display.
7. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
• You can specify which display languages are available in [Select Switchable Languages]. For
details, see "Screen Features", Device Management.
98
How to Use the [Home] Screen
System Reset
After finishing a job, the machine waits a specified length of time and then restores its settings to the
default values specified under Function Priority. This function is called "System Reset".
For the procedure for specifying default settings under Function Priority, see "Screen Features", Device
Management.
To change the length of time that the machine waits before restoring its settings to their default values,
use the System Auto Reset Timer setting. See "Timer Settings", Device Management.
99
4. Getting Started
Logging In the Machine
When the Authentication Screen is Displayed
If Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is active, the authentication
screen appears on the display. The machine only becomes operable after entering your own Login User
Name and Login Password. If User Code Authentication is active, you cannot use the machine until you
enter the User Code.
If you can use the machine, you can say that you are logged in. When you go out of the operable state,
you can say that you are logged out. After logging in the machine, be sure to log out of it to prevent
unauthorized usage.
• Ask the user administrator for the Login User Name, Login Password, and User Code. For details
about user authentication, see "Configuring User Authentication", Security Guide.
• User Code to enter on User Code Authentication is the numerical value registered in the Address
Book as "User Code".
• If authentication fails, the "Authentication has failed." message appears. Check that the Login User
Name and Login Password are correct.
User Code Authentication Using the Control Panel
If User Code Authentication is active, a screen prompting you to enter a User Code appears.
1. Enter a User Code (up to eight digits), and then press [OK].
• To log out, press the [Energy Saver] key after jobs are completed, or press and hold [Reset].
100
Logging In the Machine
Logging In Using the Control Panel
This section explains the procedure for logging in to the machine when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.
1. Press the logged-in user icon on the top right on the screen.
2. Press [User Name].
3. Enter a login user name.
4. Press [Password].
5. Enter a login password.
6. Press [Login].
• If authentication fails, the "Cannot log in." message appears. Check that the Login User Name and
Login Password are correct.
101
4. Getting Started
• When User Code Authentication is active, a different screen appears. See page 100 "User Code
Authentication Using the Control Panel".
Logging Out Using the Control Panel
This section explains the procedure for logging out the machine when Basic Authentication, Windows
Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is set.
• To prevent use of the machine by unauthorized persons, always log out when you have finished
using the machine.
1. Press the logged-in user icon on the top right on the screen.
2. Press [OK].
Auto Logout Function
This machine has an auto logout function.
If the machine is idle for a specified period, the user is automatically logged out.
Logging In Using Web Image Monitor
This section explains the procedure for logging in to the machine via Web Image Monitor.
1. Open a web browser.
102
Logging In the Machine
2. Enter "http://(the machine's IP address or host name)/" in the address bar.
3. Click [Login].
4. Enter a Login User Name and Login Password, and then click [Login].
Depending on the configuration of your web browser, the login user name and password might be
saved. If you do not want to save them, configure your web browser's settings so that this
information is not saved.
• For User Code Authentication, enter a User Code in the [Login User Name] box, and then click
[Login].
• The procedure may differ depending on the web browser used.
Logging Out Using Web Image Monitor
This section explains the procedure for logging out the machine via Web Image Monitor.
1. Click [Logout].
• Delete the cache memory of a web browser after logging out.
User Lockout Function
This machine has a User Lockout function.
If an incorrect password is entered the number of times specified by the administrator, the User Lockout
function prevents further login attempts under the same user name.
Even if the locked out user enters the correct password later, authentication will fail and it will not be
possible to use the machine.
For details about releasing a locked out user, see "User Lockout Function", Security Guide.
Changing the Login Password
You can use alphanumeric characters and symbols when registering login user passwords.
You can register up to 128 single-byte characters.
The passwords are case-sensitive. Keep this in mind when registering them.
• Do not disclose the password to outsiders. Similarly, do not write the password down and leave it
where others can see it.
103
4. Getting Started
• Change the password periodically.
• Make the password difficult to guess.
Password Policy
This machine has a password policy.
Only passwords meeting the specified criteria for level of complexity and minimum number of
characters can be registered. For details about the criteria, see "Specifying the Extended Security
Functions", Security Guide.
Passwords can contain the following characters:
• Upper case letters: A to Z (26 characters)
• Lower case letters: a to z (26 characters)
• Numbers: 0 to 9 (10 characters)
• Symbols: (space) ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _` { | } ~ (33 characters)
Some characters are not available, regardless of whether their codes are entered using the
keyboard or the control panel.
Changing the login password using the control panel
1. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon (
).
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [Login] twice.
5. Enter a login user name, and then press [OK].
6. Enter a login password, and then press [OK].
7. Press [Exit].
8. Press [Address Book Management].
9. Select the user.
10. Press [Auth. Info].
11. Press [Change] for [Login Password].
12. Enter a new login password, and then press [OK].
13. If a password reentry screen appears, enter the login password, and then press
[OK].
14. Press [OK].
15. Press [User Tools] (
16. Press [Home] (
) on the top right of the screen.
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
Changing the login password using Web Image Monitor
1. Open a web browser.
104
Logging In the Machine
2. Enter "http://(the machine's IP address or host name)/" in the address bar.
3. Click [Login].
4. Enter the login user name and login password, and then click [Login].
5. Point to [Device Management], and then click [Address Book].
6. Select the user or group.
7. Click [Change].
8. Click [Change] next to [Login Password] in the [Authentication Information] area.
9. Enter the new password in the [New Password] box.
10. Enter the new password in the [Confirm Password] box.
11. Click [OK] three times.
105
4. Getting Started
106
5. Paper Specifications and Adding
Paper
Describes how to load sheets and about their specifications.
Loading Paper
Precautions for Loading Paper
• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
• Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
Jams and misfeeds can occur when printing on thick glossy sheets. To prevent such problems, be sure to
fan glossy sheets thoroughly before loading them.
When loading paper, set the paper direction according to its grain, as shown in the following diagram:
Direction of paper grain
Trays 1-2 or the wide LCT
Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
• Even if paper is loaded as described above, normal operations and print quality might still not be
possible, depending on the paper type.
• Prints might be noticeably curled. Flatten out prints if they are creased or curled. For details about
settings for flattening out curled paper, see page 196 "0301 Correct Output Paper Curl: 1 Sided:
Face Up", page 197 "0302 Correct Output Paper Curl: 1 Sided: Face Down", and page 197
"0303 Correct Output Paper Curl: 2 Sided".
• To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the paper before loading it.
107
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• If you load paper when only a few sheets of paper remain in the tray, multiple sheet feeding may
occur. Remove any remaining paper, stack them with the new sheets of paper, and then fan the
entire stack before loading it into the tray.
• Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
• When paper in trays that are set to automatically eject unnecessary tab stock sheets runs out,
reload the tab stock from the beginning of the cycle (the first sheet).
• When you load paper into the paper tray for the first time or when you change the size or type of
paper in the paper tray, be sure to specify the appropriate paper settings in Tray Paper Settings.
For details, see page 152 "Changing Tray Paper Settings".
• For details about the paper sizes and types that can be used, see page 129 "Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types".
• You might at times hear a rustling noise from paper moving through the machine. This noise does
not indicate a malfunction.
Fanning the paper
• If you load coated paper or transparencies, it is important that you fan the sheets thoroughly.
Misfeeds may occur if paper is not fanned thoroughly.
1. Loosen the stack by riffling the sheets.
CVA068
108
Loading Paper
2. Holding its shorter ends, flex the stack back and forth to create space between the sheets.
Repeat this several times.
CVA069
CVA070
3. Make sure there is space between the sheets.
CVA071
Loading Paper into Trays 1, 2, and the Wide Large Capacity Tray
Each paper tray is loaded in the same way.
The wide LCT is identified as Tray 3, Tray 4, Tray 5, Tray 6, Tray 7, and Tray 8.
• Check the paper edges are aligned at the left side.
109
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• When you use paper of Paper Weight 7 with a convex curl greater than 5 mm, or paper of Paper
Weight 8 with a convex curl greater than 3 mm, paper jam may occur if the height of the stacked
paper is less than 4 mm. To use paper in such condition, set the paper in the tray as follows:
• Set as many as 5 to 10 more sheets than the number you intend to print
• Correct the curl amount before setting the paper
• Turn over the paper so the paper is with a concave curl.
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
DWP072
2. Load paper into the paper tray with print side up.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
DWP073
3. Carefully push the paper tray fully in until it clicks.
• Various sizes of paper can be loaded in Trays 1, 2, and the wide LCT by adjusting the positions of
side fence and end fence. For details, see page 120 "Changing the Paper Size in Trays 1, 2, and
the Wide Large Capacity Tray".
• You can load envelopes in Trays 1, 2, and the wide LCT. When loading envelopes, place them in
the correct orientation. For details, see page 146 "Envelopes".
• When using auto tray switching, covers, or slip sheets, the lamp on the front of the tray being used
will stay lit until printing is complete. While the lamp is lit, paper cannot be replenished.
110
Loading Paper
Attaching the small tab end fence to Trays 1, 2, and the Wide Large Capacity Tray
When loading the following paper, attach the small tab end fence:
• B5 JIS (width: 182 mm, length: 257 mm)–SRA4
Weight 8
(width: 225 mm, length: 320 mm) of Paper
• Carbonless paper of Paper Weight 2 or less
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
2. Take out the small tab end fence from the pocket on the right-hand side of the paper
source tray.
DWP662
3. Set the side fences to the size of the paper to be loaded, and then load paper into the
tray.
4. Attach the small tab end fence, and then align the end fence gently against the paper you
loaded while pressing the release button of the end fence.
DSC098
5. Carefully push the paper tray fully in until it clicks.
• Replace the small tab end fence after use.
111
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Loading Paper into the Multi Bypass Tray (Tray A)
Use the multi bypass tray (Tray A) to use transparencies, translucent paper, and paper that cannot be
loaded in the paper trays.
• The maximum number of sheets you can load at the same time depends on paper type. Do not
stack paper over the limit mark. For the maximum number of sheets you can load, see page 129
"Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
• Check the paper edges are aligned at the left side.
• When loading a low number of sheets, be sure not to squeeze the side fences in too tightly. If the
side fences are squeezed too tightly against the paper, the edges may crease, the paper may
misfeed, or if it weighs between 52.3–63.0 g/m2 (14.0–16.9 lb. Bond), it may wrinkle.
1. Set the side fences to the paper size, and then square the paper and load it print side up.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
DER069
2. Set the end fence.
1
2
DER070
1. End fence
2. Extender
To remove the end fence, slide it to the right by pressing the stopper down.
112
Loading Paper
CWW312
3. Press the elevator switch on the multi bypass tray (Tray A).
1
DER072
1. Elevator switch
The lamp of the elevator switch is blinking while the tray is going up, and keeps lit when it stops.
Press the elevator switch to move down the tray if you want to either add paper or remove jammed
ones.
• Pull the extender out when loading A4 , 81/2 × 11
(Tray A).
or larger sheets in the multi bypass tray
• Letterhead paper must be loaded in a specific orientation. For details, see page 118 "Loading
Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper".
• You can load envelopes into the multi bypass tray (Tray A). Envelopes must be loaded in a specific
orientation. For details, see page 146 "Envelopes".
• Specify the sizes of paper that are not automatically detected. For details about the sizes that can
be detected automatically, see page 129 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types". For details
about how to specify sizes, see page 127 "Changing to a Size That Is Not Automatically
Detected".
113
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Loading tab stock into the multi bypass tray (Tray A)
When setting tab stock, always use the tab fence. Tabs must be set at the right side of the multi bypass
tray (Tray A).
1
2
DER073
1. Tab fence
2. End fence
Loading Paper into the Interposer
• Do not place anything on top of or leave documents on the sensor. This may lead to the paper size
not being correctly scanned or paper jams.
1. While pressing the release lever, align the side fences with the paper size to be loaded.
• Interposer CI5030
DER099
• Interposer CI5040
114
Loading Paper
EAQ131
2. Load paper orderly.
• Interposer CI5030
When loading paper larger than A4 (81/2 × 11) , pull out the paper extender.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
Align the side fences gently against the paper you loaded, if necessary.
1
DER100
1. Paper extender
• Interposer CI5040
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
The interposer tray automatically starts the operation shortly after loading paper. Adjust the
side fences and end fence before that.
Align the side fences gently against the paper you loaded, if necessary.
115
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
EDB119
While pressing the release lever, align the end fence to the loaded paper.
EDB120
• Load paper with its printed side up (the front side). If you are using the booklet finisher, load sheets
print side down.
• Load paper in the interposer in the same orientation as paper in the paper tray.
• The staple position or punch hole position will be on the left side of the paper, when you are facing
the machine.
Loading Cover Sheets into the Interposer of the Perfect Binder
• The length/size of cover sheets depends on the thickness of the spine.
• Load paper in the
orientation.
• Do not place anything on top of or leave documents on the sensor. This may lead to the paper size
not being correctly detected or paper jams.
Estimating the thickness of the spine
This section explains how to calculate the approximate spine thickness and the cover sheet length
and size.
116
Loading Paper
Note that the length and size of a cover sheet depends on the thickness of the book block spine.
The following list shows examples for A4 or 81/2 × 11 size, 80.0 g/m2 (21.0 lb. Bond) paper:
• 10-sheet book block: 1 mm (0.04 inches)
• 30-sheet book block: 3 mm (0.12 inches)
• 50-sheet book block: 5 mm (0.20 inches)
• 80-sheet book block: 8 mm (0.32 inches)
• 100-sheet book block: 10 mm (0.40 inches)
• 200-sheet book block: 20 mm (0.80 inches)
Specify the cover sheet size based on the thickness of the book block spine. Use the following
equation to calculate the length of the cover sheet:
Minimum length of cover sheet (mm/inch) = "length of book block sheet (mm/inch)" × 2 +
"thickness of spine (mm/inch)"
To perfect bind a booklet with the following dimensions, specify a cover sheet length of at least
440 mm (17.4 inches):
2
2
1
3
CWW369
1. Length of book block sheet
2. Thickness of spine
3. Length of cover sheet
1. While lightly pinching the side fence, align it with the paper size to be loaded.
CWW323
117
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
2. Load paper face up and neatly stacked.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
CWW324
• You cannot perfect bind a booklet if the thickness of the book block's spine exceeds 23 mm (0.9
inches).
• Depending on your machine, the procedure for selecting the orientation of covers and originals
might be slightly different. For details, refer to the procedure for your machine.
• When loading thick paper of 251.0 g/m2 (138.8 lb. Index) or heavier in the interposer trays of
the perfect binder, make sure the grain of the paper is perpendicular to the feed direction.
• If you are loading sheets that are likely to stick together (such as sheets of coated paper), be sure
to fan them thoroughly before loading. Fanning them will help prevent jams and allow them to be
fed in one sheet at a time.
• The perfect binding process may scratch glossy paper.
Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper
Use the settings and paper orientations shown below to ensure the printer prints onto orientation-fixed
paper (such as letterhead or continuous stationery) correctly. Place paper as shown below.
Paper orientation
The meanings of the icons are as follows:
Icon
Meaning
Load paper printed side face up.
118
Loading Paper
Print side
Trays 1-2, Multi bypass tray (Tray A), or wide
LCT
One-sided
Two-sided
• To print on letterhead paper, specify the appropriate paper type in the printer driver's settings.
• Press [Tray Paper Settings], specify [Letterhead] as "Paper Type" for the paper tray you want to use.
See page 152 "Changing Tray Paper Settings".
119
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Changing the Paper Size
Precautions for Changing the Paper Size
• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
• Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
• Do not change the size of the paper for the specified printing tray while documents are being
printed.
• After loading paper whose sizes are not detected automatically, be sure to specify the appropriate
paper size in [Tray Paper Settings]. If you do not, misfeeds might occur. For details, see page 127
"Changing to a Size That Is Not Automatically Detected".
• To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the paper before loading.
• Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
• For details about the paper sizes and types that can be used, see page 129 "Recommended
Paper Sizes and Types".
Changing the Paper Size in Trays 1, 2, and the Wide Large Capacity Tray
The paper size setting is changed in the same way for each paper tray.
• Check that the paper edges are aligned with the left side.
• Pay attention to the following things when using the banner sheet tray of wide LCT:
• Set one long-end fence between the paper size indicators under the bottom plate. If you set
the end fence on the bottom plate, the end fence may collide with the upper part of the paper
tray and fall over inside the machine. Contact your sales representative if the end fence falls
over inside the machine.
• Set the two short-end fences to the right and left of the paper size indicators on the bottom
plate.
• If you are not using the end fences, push them down and keep them to the side in the paper
tray. If you keep the end fences in any other position, they may fall over inside the machine, or
the end fences may interfere while you load paper.
120
Changing the Paper Size
• Do not place the end fence under the bottom plate. When the bottom plate descends, the
bottom plate may skew and break.
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
DWP072
2. Remove paper if loaded.
3. Release the end fence.
DWP074
4. While pressing the release button of the side fence, slide the side fence outward.
DWP075
5. Load paper by aligning the paper with the left side of the paper tray.
Place paper with print side up.
121
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Load a stack of paper about 5–10 mm (0.2–0.4 inches) high.
Make sure the paper rest on top of the supporting plates on both sides.
DWP076
When you load paper that is 204 mm (8.04 inches) or shorter, remove the supporting plates from
the bottom of the paper tray.
1
DWP077
1. Supporting plates
Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the paper tray to adjust the side fences the space
provided by the side fences is somewhat wider than the paper size. Load paper so that both sides
are on the auxiliary side fences.
DWQ012
122
Changing the Paper Size
6. Take the grip of the side fences with your fingers, and adjust the side fences to the paper
size.
Set the paper flush against the bottom of the inner side fence.
Check that the scale numbers on the top of the side fences are roughly the same.
DWP078
7. Load additional sheets, if necessary.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.
DWP079
8. Tightly fit the end fence to the loaded paper, and then re-lock the end fence again.
Make sure there are no gaps between the paper and end fence.
DWP080
9. Carefully push the paper tray fully in until it clicks.
123
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• After sliding the paper tray in, make sure that the paper size is changed correctly on the [Top]
icon at the upper
screen. To display the [Top] screen, display the [Home] screen and press the
right corner of the screen.
• You can load envelopes in Trays 1, 2, and the wide LCT. When loading envelopes, place them in
the correct orientation. For details, see page 146 "Envelopes".
• Do not push in the paper presser on the upper part of the side fence. If it is pushed in, return it to its
original position by hand.
1
DWQ016
1. Paper presser
• When you load paper that is 420.0 mm (16.54 inches) or wider in the banner sheet tray of the
wide LCT, load it as follows:
• Press the elevator switch to move the bottom plate down until the lamp goes out, and then
open the cover and load the paper.
• Hold the paper lengthwise and load it little by little.
• If you load thin paper or coated paper, load it little by little. Press down on the paper while
you load it so that the paper loaded in the bottom is not dragged.
• If you load thick paper, load it little by little and align the side fence with the horizontal side of
the paper.
• Check that the paper is correctly positioned against the back of the paper tray and the label
on which is printed the paper sizes for the paper tray.
• When you load paper that is 420.0-559.9 mm (16.54–22.00 inches) wide, use two shortend fences.
124
Changing the Paper Size
1
2
3
DWP841
1. Side fence extension
2. Side fence
3. Short-end fences
• When you load paper that is 560.0-700.0 mm (22.00–27.55 inches) wide, use one longend fence.
1
2
3
DWP842
1. Side fence extension
2. Side fence
3. Long-end fences
• When you load paper, load the paper and set the auxiliary side fence. Align the auxiliary
side fence against the side of the paper that is higher than the side fence extension.
• Adjust the side fences according to the corresponding instructions on the label attached to the
tray.
Attaching the tab fence in Trays 1, 2, and the wide Large Capacity Tray
When loading tab stock, attach the tab fence.
125
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray carefully out
until it stops.
DWP072
2. Take out the tab fence from the pocket on the right-hand side of the wide Large Capacity
Tray.
DWP081
3. Adjust the side fences according to the size of the tab stock to be loaded, and then load
the tab stock.
Load the tab stocks with their side with the tabs facing the end fence.
4. Attach the tab fence, and then align the end fence gently against the paper you loaded
while pressing the release button of the end fence.
DER098
5. Carefully push the paper tray fully in until it clicks.
126
Changing the Paper Size
• Replace the tab fence after use.
Changing to a Size That Is Not Automatically Detected
If you load a paper size that is not selected automatically, specify the paper size using the control panel.
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Select the tray for which you want to change the paper size.
3. Select the [Manual Setting] check box.
4. Press [Edit the Settings].
5. Press [Paper Size].
6. Select the loaded paper size, and then press [Save Paper].
7. Press [
].
8. Press [Home] (
) at the center bottom of the screen.
• For details about paper sizes selected automatically, see page 129 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
• If you want to print on paper that is selected automatically after printing on a paper size that is not
selected automatically, you must return the setting to [Auto Detect]. Reload the paper, and select
[Auto Detect] in step 5.
127
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Changing to a Custom Paper Size
When the custom size paper is loaded, the user must specify the paper size using the control panel.
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Select the tray for which you want to change the paper size.
3. Select the [Manual Setting] check box.
4. Press [Edit the Settings].
5. Press [Paper Size].
6. Press [Custom Size].
7. Press the setting value next to [A:].
8. Enter the horizontal size using the number keys, and then press [Enter].
9. Press the setting value next to [B:].
10. Enter the vertical size using the number keys, and then press [Enter].
11. Press [OK].
12. Press [Save Paper].
13. Press
.
14. Press [Home] (
128
) at the center bottom of the screen.
Recommended Paper
Recommended Paper
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types
This section describes recommended paper sizes and types.
• If you use paper that curls, either because it is too dry or too damp, a staple clogging or paper jam
may occur.
• Do not use paper designed for inkjet printers, as these may stick to the fusing unit and cause a
misfeed.
• When you load transparencies, check the front and back of the sheets, and place them correctly,
or a misfeed might occur.
Trays 1, 2, and Wide LCT (Trays 3 to 8)*1, *14
Paper type and weight
52.3–470.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–172 lb. Cover)*17
Paper Weight 1–Paper
Weight 9*2*16
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:*3
Paper capacity
2,400 sheets
A3 *4, A4
, A5
, B4 JIS
, 11 × 17 *4, 81/2 × 14 ,
81/2 × 11 , 8 × 13 , 71/4 ×
101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 ×
18 *4, 13 × 191/5 *4, SRA3
*4, SRA4
A3 *4, A4 , A5 , B4 JIS ,
11 × 17 *4, 81/2 × 14 , 81/2
× 11
, 8 × 13 , 71/4 ×
1
10 /2 , 51/2 × 81/2
, 12 ×
*4
1
*4
, 13 × 19 /5
, SRA3
18
*4, SRA4
129
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
52.3–470.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–172 lb. Cover)*17
Paper Weight 1–Paper
Weight 9*2*16
Paper size
Paper capacity
Select the paper size using the
Tray Paper Settings menu:
A6
*5, B5 JIS
*5, 81/
2 × 13
×
11
2
4 × 14
*5, 81/ × 13 *5, 8 × 13
4
*5, 8 × 10 *5, 71/ × 101/
4
2
*5, 51/ × 81/ *5, 8K *5,
2
2
*5,
16K
*5, 81/
*5, 81/
11 × 15 *5, 11 × 14 *5, 10 ×
15 *5, 10 × 14 *5, 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA4 *5,
*5, 310 ×
226 × 310 mm
1
432 mm , 8 /2 × 132/5 ,
41/5 × 51/2 *5
A4
A6
14
*5, A5 *5, B5 JIS
*5, 81/
*5, 81/
*5, 8 × 10
*5, 8K
15
2 × 13
4×
*5, 8 × 13
4 × 13
*5, 71/
*5, 16K
*5, 11 × 14
*5,
*5, 81/
*5,
1
4 × 10 /2
*5, 11 ×
10 × 15 *5, 10 × 14 *5, 13 ×
19 , 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5
× 181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA4
*5, 226 × 310 mm
*5, 310 ×
432 mm , 81/2 × 132/5 *5,
41/5 × 51/2 *5
130
2,400 sheets
Recommended Paper
Paper type and weight
52.3–470.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–172 lb. Cover)*17
Paper Weight 1–Paper
Weight 9*2*16
Paper size
Custom size: *6
Paper capacity
2,400 sheets
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
Coated: Glossy*18
Coated: Matte*18
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:*3
*8
Carbonless paper*15
52.3–470.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–172 lb. Cover)*17
Paper Weight 1–Paper
Weight 9*2*16
A3 *4, A4
, A5
, B4 JIS
*4
1
, 11 × 17
, 8 /2 × 14 ,
81/2 × 11 , 8 × 13 , 71/4 ×
101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12 ×
18 *4, 13 × 191/5 *4, SRA3
*4, SRA4
A3 *4, A4 , A5 , B4 JIS ,
11 × 17 *4, 81/2 × 14 , 81/2
× 11
, 8 × 13 , 71/4 ×
1
10 /2 , 51/2 × 81/2
, 12 ×
18 *4, 13 × 191/5 *4, SRA3
*4, SRA4
131
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
Coated: Glossy*18
Coated: Matte*18
Paper size
Paper capacity
Select the paper size using the
Tray Paper Settings menu:
Carbonless paper*15
52.3–470.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–172 lb. Cover)*17
Paper Weight 1–Paper
Weight 9*2*16
A6
*5, B5 JIS
*5, 81/
2 × 13
×
11
2
4 × 14
*5, 81/ × 13 *5, 8 × 13
4
*5, 8 × 10 *5, 71/ × 101/
4
2
*5, 51/ × 81/ *5, 8K *5,
2
2
*5,
16K
*5, 81/
*5, 81/
11 × 15 *5, 11 × 14 *5, 10 ×
15 *5, 10 × 14 *5, 13 × 19
, 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA4 *5,
*5, 310 ×
226 × 310 mm
1
432 mm , 8 /2 × 132/5 ,
41/5 × 51/2 *5
A4
A6
14
*5, A5 *5, B5 JIS
*5, 81/
*5, 81/
*5, 8 × 10
*5, 8K
15
2 × 13
4×
*5, 8 × 13
4 × 13
*5, 71/
*5, 16K
*5, 11 × 14
*5,
*5, 81/
*5,
1
4 × 10 /2
*5, 11 ×
10 × 15 *5, 10 × 14 *5, 13 ×
19 , 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5
× 181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA4
*5, 226 × 310 mm
*5, 310 ×
432 mm , 81/2 × 132/5 *5,
41/5 × 51/2 *5
132
*8
Recommended Paper
Paper type and weight
Coated: Glossy*18
Paper size
Custom size: *6
Paper capacity
*8
Coated: Matte*18
Carbonless paper*15
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm
52.3–470.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Paper Weight 1–Paper
Weight 9*2*16
Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches
Bond–172 lb. Cover)*17
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
Translucent paper
A3 , A4
, B5 JIS
Transparencies
A4
Tab stock*9
A4 , 81/2 × 11
Label paper*18
A4
Envelopes*7
*10, *11, *12
, 81/2 × 11
, 81/2 × 11
*8
*8
*8
*8
*14
240 × 332 mm, 235 × 120 mm,
120 × 235 mm, 105 × 241 mm,
110 × 220 mm
*1 You can install the banner sheet tray for Tray 3, 5, or 7.
*2 When paper whose horizontal length is 487.8 mm (19.20 inches) or more is specified, the maximum
paper weight of the tray is Paper Weight 7.
*3 When the banner sheet tray is installed, paper sizes are not detected automatically.
*4 When the banner sheet tray is installed, select the paper size using the Tray Paper Settings menu.
*5 When the banner sheet tray is installed, you cannot select paper sizes.
*6 When the banner sheet tray is installed, up to 800 sheets of paper that is 420.0-700.0 mm
(16.54-27.55 inches) long can be fed.
*7 When the banner sheet tray is installed, you cannot select paper types.
*8 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
paper weights and conditions.
*9 The tab fence is required.
*10 Open the flaps, and load the envelopes with their flaps pointed toward the right side of the paper tray.
*11 It is necessary to specify the sizes of the envelopes including their flap sizes using [Custom Size] in [Tray
Paper Settings].
*12 The envelope sizes on the table do not include their flaps.
133
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
*13 Flatten curls so that they fit within the following guidelines.
• 52.3–256.0 g/m2 paper: Curl height 10 mm (0.39 inches) or below, R over 100 mm (3.94
inches)
• 256.1–300 g/m2 paper: Height of face curl 10 mm (0.39 inches) or below, height of back
curl 4 mm (0.16 inches) or below, R over 100 mm (3.94 inches)
• 300.1–350 g/m2 paper: Height of face curl 10 mm (0.4 inches) or below, height of back
curl 2 mm (0.08 inches) or below, R over 100 mm (3.94 inches)
• 350.1–4700 g/m2 paper: Height of face curl 10 mm (0.39 inches), height of back curl 0
mm, R over 100 mm (3.94 inches)
*14 Flatten the curl on the envelope, then set the difference of the stack height of the bottom of the envelope
and the stack height of the flap portion to be 10 mm (0.4 inches) or below.
*15 Attach the small tab end fence when loading carbonless paper of paper weight 2 or less.
*16 When loading the following paper, attach the small tab end fence:
B5 JIS (width: 182 mm; length: 257 mm)–SRA4 (width: 225 mm; length: 320 mm) of Paper
Weight 8
*17 The paper brand of usable paper of 400g/m2 or more is specified. For details, contact your local
dealer.
*18 Avoid use in high temperature and humidity.
Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
Paper type and weight
52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 1–Paper
Weight 5
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
A3 , A4
, A5
, A6 , B4
JIS , B5 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2
× 11 , 8 × 13 , 51/2 × 81/2
, SRA3
A3 , A4 , A5 , A6 , B4 JIS
, B5 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 ×
11
, 8 × 13 , 51/2 × 81/2
, 12 × 18
134
Paper capacity
500 sheets
Recommended Paper
Paper type and weight
52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 1–Paper
Weight 5
Paper size
*1
Paper capacity
500 sheets
B5 JIS , B6 JIS , 81/2 × 14 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4
× 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2
, 51/2 × 81/2
, 8K , 16K
, 11 × 15 ,
12 × 18 , 11 × 14 ,
10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 13 ×
191/5 , 13 × 19 , 123/5 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13
× 18 , SRA4
, 226 × 310
mm
, 310 × 432 mm , 81/2
× 132/5 , 41/5 × 51/2
A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , B6 JIS ,
81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/4
× 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2
, 8K , 16K
, 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 ×
15 ,
10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 ×
19 , 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5
× 181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4
, 226 × 310 mm
,
310 × 432 mm , 81/2 × 132/5
, 41/5 × 51/2
52.3–216.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 1–Paper
Weight 5
Custom size:*2
500 sheets
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm*3
Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches*3
Translucent paper
A3 , A4
, B5 JIS
*4
135
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
Paper size
, 81/2 × 11
Transparencies
A4
Tab stock*5
A4 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/2 × 14
Paper capacity
*4
*4
10 sheets
Envelopes
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Vertical: 3.94–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
*1 Select the paper size. For details, see page 152 "Changing Tray Paper Settings".
*2 Enter the paper size. For details, see page 152 "Changing Tray Paper Settings".
*3 When the banner sheet tray of multi bypass tray (Tray A) is installed, the maximum horizontal length of
custom size paper is 700.0 mm (27.55 inches).
*4 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
paper weights and conditions.
*5 The tab fence is required.
Interposer CI5030
Paper type and weight
64.0–216.0 g/m2 (17.1 lb.
Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 2–Paper
Weight 5
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS ,
B5 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
, 8 × 13 , 51/2 × 81/2 ,
SRA3
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5
JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
,
8 × 13 , 51/2 × 81/2
, 12 ×
18
136
Paper capacity
200 sheets × 2
Recommended Paper
Paper type and weight
64.0–216.0 g/m2 (17.1 lb.
Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 2–Paper
Weight 5
Paper size
Select the paper size using the
Tray Paper Settings menu:
Paper capacity
200 sheets × 2
B5 JIS , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 ×
13 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/4 × 14
, 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4
× 101/2
, 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K
, 16K
, 12 × 18 ,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15
, 10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 ,
13 × 19 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18 ,
SRA4
, 226 × 310 mm
,
1
2
310 × 432 mm , 8 /2 × 13 /5
A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 14
, 81/2 × 13 , 81/4 × 14 ,
1
8 /4 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2
, 8K , 16K
, 11 ×
15 ,
11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14
, 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 ,
123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4
, 226 × 310 mm
,
310 × 432 mm ,81/2 × 132/5
64.0–216.0 g/m2 (17.1 lb.
Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
Paper Weight 2–Paper
Weight 5
Custom size:
200 sheets × 2
Vertical: 139.7–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Vertical: 5.50–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
137
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Interposer CI5040
Paper type and weight
52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper
Weight 7
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS ,
B5 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
, 8 × 13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12
× 18
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5
JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
,
1
1
8 × 13 , 5 /2 × 8 /2
, 12 ×
18
138
Paper capacity
180 sheets × 2
Recommended Paper
Paper type and weight
52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper
Weight 7
Paper size
Select the paper size using the
Tray Paper Settings menu:
Paper capacity
180 sheets × 2
B5 JIS , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 ×
132/5 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 ×
11 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13
, 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2
,
1
5 /2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K
,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15
, 10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 ,
13 × 19 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18 ,
SRA3 , SRA4
A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 14
, 81/2 × 132/5 , 81/2 × 13
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8
× 10 , 71/4 × 101/2
, 8K
, 16K
, 11 × 15 ,
11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14
, 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 ,
123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4
52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper
Weight 7
Custom size:
180 sheets × 2
Vertical: 139.7–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Vertical: 5.50–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
139
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper type and weight
Coated: Glossy
Coated: Matte
105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 4–Paper
Weight 7
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be detected
automatically:
Paper capacity
*1
A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS ,
B5 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
, 8 × 13 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 12
× 18
A3 , A4 , A5 , B4 JIS , B5
JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
,
8 × 13 , 51/2 × 81/2
, 12 ×
18
Coated: Glossy
Coated: Matte
105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 4–Paper
Weight 7
Select the paper size using the
Tray Paper Settings menu:
B5 JIS , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 ×
132/5 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 ×
11 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13
, 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2
,
1
1
5 /2 × 8 /2 , 8K , 16K
,
11 × 15 , 11 × 14 , 10 × 15
, 10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 ,
13 × 19 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18 ,
SRA3 , SRA4
A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 14
, 81/2 × 132/5 , 81/2 × 13
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8
× 10 , 71/4 × 101/2
, 8K
, 16K
, 11 × 15 ,
11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14
, 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 ,
123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 ×
181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 ,
SRA4
140
*1
Recommended Paper
Paper type and weight
Coated: Glossy
Paper size
Paper capacity
*1
Custom size:
Coated: Matte
105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 4–Paper
Weight 7
Vertical: 139.7–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm
Vertical: 5.50–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 5.50–19.20 inches
, B5 JIS
*1
Translucent paper
A3 , A4
Transparencies
A4
Tab stock
A4 , 81/2 × 11
*1
A4 , 81/2 × 11
*1
, 81/2 × 11
*1
52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper
Weight 7
Tab Stock: Glossy
Tab Stock: Matte
Tab Stock: High Gloss
105.1–300.0 g/m2 (28.1 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 4–Paper
Weight 7
Label paper
A4
, 81/2 × 11
*1
52.3–300.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 1–Paper
Weight 7
*1 Do not stack paper over the limit mark. The maximum number of sheets you can set at once depends on
the paper's thickness and condition.
141
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Interposer of the perfect binder
Paper type and weight
90.0–300.0 g/m2 (24.1 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 4–Paper
Weight 7
Paper size
Paper sizes that can be
detected automatically:
Paper capacity
200 sheets (or up to 24 mm in
height) × 2
A3 , 13 × 19
11 × 17 , 13 × 19
90.0–300.0 g/m2 (24.1 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 4–Paper
Weight 7
Select the paper size using the
Tray Paper Settings menu:
200 sheets (or up to 24 mm in
height) × 2
B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 8K ,
12 × 18 , 11 × 15 , 13 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18
, SRA3 , 310 × 432 mm
A3 , B4 JIS , 8K , 12 ×
18 , 11 × 15 , 13 ×
191/5 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18
, SRA3 , 310 × 432 mm
90.0–300.0 g/m2 (24.1 lb.
Bond–165.0 lb. Index)
Paper Weight 4–Paper
Weight 7
Custom size:
Vertical: 257.0–330.2 mm
Horizontal: 364.0–487.7 mm
Vertical: 10.12–13.00 inches
Horizontal: 14.34–19.20
inches
142
200 sheets (or up to 24 mm in
height) × 2
Recommended Paper
Paper weight
Paper weight*1
Metric
Bond paper
Cover paper
Index paper
Paper Weight
1*2
52.3–63.0
g/m2
14.0–16.9 lb.
Bond
19.0–23.0 lb.
Cover
29.0–34.9 lb.
Index
Paper Weight 2
63.1–80.0
g/m2
17.0–21.0 lb.
Bond
23.1–29.9 lb.
Cover
35.0–44.0 lb.
Index
Paper Weight 3
80.1–105.0
g/m2
21.1–28.0 lb.
Bond
30.0–38.9 lb.
Cover
44.1–58.0 lb.
Index
Paper Weight 4
105.1–163.0
g/m2
28.1–43.0 lb.
Bond
39.0–60.0 lb.
Cover
58.1–90.0 lb.
Index
Paper Weight 5
163.1–220.0
g/m2
43.1–58.9 lb.
Bond
60.1–80.9 lb.
Cover
90.1–121.0 lb.
Index
Paper Weight 6
220.1–256.0
g/m2
59.0–68.0 lb.
Bond
81.0–94.0 lb.
Cover
121.1–141.0 lb.
Index
Paper Weight 7
256.1–300.0
g/m2
68.1–80.0 lb.
Bond
94.1–110.0 lb.
Cover
141.1–165.0 lb.
Index
Paper Weight 8
300.1–350.0
g/m2
80.1–93.3 lb.
Bond
110.1–128.8 lb. 165.1–193.3 lb.
Cover
Index
Paper Weight
9*3
350.1–470.0
g/m2
93.4–172 lb.
Cover
128.9–147.0 lb. 193.4–221.0 lb.
Cover
Index
*1 Print quality will decrease if the paper you are using is close to the minimum or maximum weight.
Change the paper weight setting to thinner or thicker.
*2 When loading paper of 52.3–63.0 g/m2 (14.0–16.9 lb. Bond), the edges may crease or the paper
misfeed depending on the paper type.
*3 The paper brand of usable paper of 400g/m2 or more is specified. For details, contact your local
dealer.
• The calibration process using the in-line sensor with the controller connected is valid for the
following paper sizes:
• A4 , 81/2 × 11 , A3, 11 × 17, SRA3
• Certain types of paper, such as translucent paper or transparencies, may produce noise when
delivered. This noise does not indicate a problem and print quality is unaffected.
143
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• The paper capacity described in the tables above is an example. Actual paper capacity might be
lower, depending on the paper type.
• When loading paper, make sure the stack height does not exceed the limit mark of the paper tray.
• If multiple sheet feeding occurs, fan sheets thoroughly or load sheets one by one from the multi
bypass tray (Tray A).
• You can specify whether or not the machine auto detects multi-sheet feeds in paper from every tray.
In [0304 Detect JAM099] under [Adjustment Settings for Operators], you can also specify whether
current jobs are suspended or continued when a multi-sheet feed is detected. You can specify the
double-feed detection setting for Interposer CI5040 in "2101 Detect JAM573" or "2101 Detect
JAM574". However, depending on the condition of the paper, the machine may not detect a multisheet feed correctly. For details about Adjustment Settings for Operators, see page 198 "0304
Detect JAM099", see page 255 "2101 Detect JAM573", or see page 255 "2101 Detect
JAM574".
• Flatten out curled sheets before loading them.
• The Adjust Paper Curl function might not be able to fully remove curl, depending on the type of
paper and the direction of its grain. If long grain paper does not uncurl properly, try short grain
paper instead. For details about the Adjust Paper Curl function, see page 196 "0301 Correct
Output Paper Curl: 1 Sided: Face Up", page 197 "0302 Correct Output Paper Curl: 1 Sided:
Face Down", and page 197 "0303 Correct Output Paper Curl: 2 Sided".
• Depending on the paper's size, paper weight or paper type, the print speed may be slower than
usual.
• When loading envelopes, see page 146 "Envelopes".
• When printing onto letterhead paper, the paper placing orientation is different depending on
which function you are using. For details, see page 118 "Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Twosided Paper".
• The paper types you can select in Tray Paper Settings are only general classifications. Print quality
for every kind of paper in a classification is not guaranteed. For details, see page 150 "Unusable
Paper".
• If the surface of the paper is dusty, white spots might appear on prints. To remove dust, fan the
paper thoroughly.
• When loading label paper:
• Select [Label Paper] for [Paper Type] in [Tray Paper Settings], and select an appropriate
paper weight under [Paper Weight].
• When loading transparencies:
• To print on transparencies, select [Transparency] for [Paper Type] in [Tray Paper Settings].
• When you load transparencies, check the front and back of the sheets, and place them
correctly, or a misfeed might occur.
144
Recommended Paper
• Fan transparencies thoroughly whenever you use them. This prevents transparencies from
sticking together, and from feeding incorrectly.
• Remove printed sheets one by one.
• When outputting to the high capacity stacker, specify the output tray as the stacker upper tray.
For details, see "General Features", Device Management.
• When loading translucent paper:
• When loading translucent paper, always use long grain paper, and set the paper direction
according to the grain.
• Translucent paper easily absorbs humidity and becomes curled. Remove curl in the translucent
paper before loading. For details about settings for flattening out curled paper, see
page 196 "0301 Correct Output Paper Curl: 1 Sided: Face Up", page 197 "0302 Correct
Output Paper Curl: 1 Sided: Face Down", and page 197 "0303 Correct Output Paper Curl:
2 Sided".
• Remove printed sheets one by one.
• When loading coated paper:
• If you want to use glossy paper, select [Coated: Glossy] or [Coated: High Gloss] for [Paper
Type]. If you want to use matted paper (including silk, dull, and satin paper), select [Coated:
Matte] for [Paper Type]. For details about the settings for using coated paper with custom
paper, see page 24 "Registering a Custom Paper".
• When loading coated paper or glossy paper, always fan the paper before using it.
• If a paper jam occurs or if the machine makes a strange noise when feeding stacks of coated
paper, feed the coated paper one sheet at a time.
• To load coated paper into the wide LCT, you must specify [Coated: Glossy], [Coated: Matte],
or [Coated: High Gloss] as the paper type and select an appropriate paper weight under
[Paper Weight].
• When setting colored paper:
• Depending on the color of the paper, the paper's position may not be detected correctly,
causing the paper to jam.
• When using light-colored paper, specify the paper type as [Color] in [Tray Paper Settings].
• When using black or dark colored paper, or when specifying the paper type as [Color] in
[Tray Paper Settings] does not clear paper jams, specify the paper type as [Black].
• When using carbonless paper, note the following:
• Carbonless paper can be used only when wide LCT is used along with Finisher SR
5050/5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5060/5120 for post-processing.
• Duplex printing cannot be performed.
• To load sheets of paper whose sizes are A5 or 51/2 × 81/2:
145
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• When delivering sheets of paper whose sizes are A5 or 51/2 × 81/2, open the left
mainframe front cover and turn the lever for A5/Half Letter to the right.
DFT090
• When the Clear File Folder is curled, flatten the Clear File Folder so that the difference in height at
the opposing edges is less than 18 mm (0.71 inches) before loading.
Envelopes
This section describes loading envelopes.
• Misfeeds might occur depending on the length and shape of the flaps.
• Only envelopes that are at least 139.7 mm (5.5 inches) wide can be loaded.
To print on envelopes, load them into the Wide LCT or multi bypass tray (Tray A), and be sure to specify
an appropriate paper type.
To load envelopes, be sure to unfold their flaps and set them in the
orientation with print side face up.
CDL070
If you are printing onto side-opening envelopes, be sure to unfold their flaps and set them in the
orientation with print side face up. Flaps must be at the right side of the Wide LCT or multi bypass tray
(Tray A).
146
Recommended Paper
CDL081
Recommended envelopes
For information about recommended envelopes, contact your local dealer.
Storage of envelopes
Keep envelopes stored in sealed plastic bags and remove only the quantity needed. Do not add
envelopes during printing, as this might cause misfeeds.
Loading envelopes on the wide LCT
• If a paper jam occurs, load 5 more envelopes.
• Keep the height difference between the bottom of the envelopes and flaps within 10 mm.
10mm
Min.
Max.
DSC096
• Be sure to specify the size of the envelope and flap size in [Tray Paper Settings]. For details, see
page 128 "Changing to a Custom Paper Size".
• When using envelopes, set [Paper Weight] in [Tray Paper Settings] to the same value as two sheets
of the paper used for the envelopes.
• Before loading envelopes, press down on them to remove any air inside and to flatten any edges
or creases. When envelopes are curled, flatten the envelopes so that the amount of curling is less
than 5 mm (0.2 inches). If a paper jam, non-feeding or double-feeding occurs even after
correcting the curl, load one envelope at one time.
• Place one envelope at a time if you still get any of the following results:
147
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• The envelope jams
• The envelope is not fed
• Multiple envelopes are fed at the same time
• Humidity levels of over 50% can cause envelopes to come out creased or misprinted.
• Certain types of envelopes might come out creased, dirtied, or misprinted. If you are printing a
solid color or image on an envelope, lines may appear where the overlapped edges of the
envelope make it thicker.
• If the horizontal size of the envelope is 297 mm (11.7 inches) or less, a paper misfeed might occur.
If this happens, turn off Skew Detection. For details, see page 200 "0307 Control J097/098".
• When printing on envelopes thicker than 127.0 g/m2 (47.0 lb. Cover), do not use [П Curl
Correction Level: Large] or [U Curl Correction Level: Large] for [0301 Correct Output Paper Curl]
of [Adjustment Settings for Operators].
Paper Weight Conversion Table
The weight of paper is measured as paper weight or ream weight.
Paper weight is the weight of one square meter of a sheet of paper, measured in units of g/m2. Ream
weight is the weight in pounds of 500 sheets of the paper. The basic size varies depending on the type
(grade) of paper.
The basic sizes for each grade are as follow:
• Bond, Ledger: 17" × 22"
• Offset, Text: 25" × 38"
• Cover: 20" × 26"
• Index: 251/2" × 301/2"
Ream weight can be calculated using the following equation:
Ream weight (lb.) = paper weight (g/m2) × dimension of paper (m2/sheet) × 500 (sheets)
The following table shows the relationship between paper weight and ream weight:
Ream weight
148
Paper weight
Bond / Ledger
Offset / Text
Cover
Index
(g/m2)
(lb.)
(lb. text)
(lb. cover)
(lb. index)
52
14
36
20
29
60
16 *
40 *
22
33
75
20 *
50 *
28
42
Recommended Paper
Ream weight
Paper weight
Bond / Ledger
Offset / Text
Cover
Index
(g/m2)
(lb.)
(lb. text)
(lb. cover)
(lb. index)
90
24 *
60 *
33
50
105
28 *
70 *
39
58
108
29
73
40 *
60
118
31
80 *
44
65
120
32 *
81
45
67
135
36
90
50 *
75
148
39
100 *
55
82
162
43
110
60 *
90 *
176
47
120
65 *
97
199
53
135
74
110 *
216
58
146
80 *
120
244
65
165
90 *
135
253
67
171
94
140 *
256
68
173
95
142
270
72
183
100 *
150
297
79
201
110 *
165
307
82
208
114
170 *
325
87
220
120
180 *
351
94
237
130 *
194
398
106
269
147
220 *
405
108
274
150
224
Asterisks (*) indicate the most common weights for that category.
149
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Unusable Paper
• Do not attempt to print on stapled sheets, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or any kind of
conductive paper. Doing so risks fire.
• To prevent faults, do not use any of the following kinds of treated paper:
• Paper for inkjet printers
• Thermal paper
• Art paper
• Aluminum foil
• Carbon paper
• Conductive paper
• Paper with perforated lines
• Hemmed-edge paper
• Window envelopes
• If you use metallic/pearl paper or black paper, the conductivity of the paper may affect the
machine. Use only paper that has been verified. If any problem occurs, stop feeding the paper
immediately and contact your service representative.
• Faults can occur if you print onto sides that are already printed. Take care to print onto unprinted
sides only.
• Certain types of transparencies for color printing cannot be used. For details about types that can
be used, contact your sales or service representative.
• To prevent misfeeds, do not use the following kinds of paper:
• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Perforated paper
• Slippery paper
• Torn paper
• Rough paper
• Thin paper with little stiffness
• Paper with a dusty surface
• The following paper types are not supported by the perfect binder and the interposer.
• Heavily curled paper
150
Recommended Paper
• Paper with staples or clips
• Torn paper
• Paper with holes
• Rough paper
• Smooth paper
• Thin and soft paper
• Cardstock
• Paper with penciled characters or images
• Folded paper
• Label paper*1
• Tab stock*1
• Even supported types of paper may cause paper jams or malfunctions if the paper is not in good
condition.
• If you print onto rough grain paper, the output image might be blurred.
• Do not load sheets that have already been printed onto by another machine. (Sheets can become
jammed if they have been improperly stored.)
*1 These are supported by Interposer CI5040.
Paper Storage
• When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:
• Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Avoid storing paper in humid areas (humidity: 70% or less).
• Store all your thick paper in the same environment - a room where the temperature is 20–
25°C (68–77°F) and the humidity is 30–65%.
• Store on a flat surface.
• Do not store paper vertically.
• Once opened, store paper in plastic bags.
151
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Changing Tray Paper Settings
This section explains how to specify the size and type of the paper that is loaded in the source tray.
For an overview of the paper settings and how to register a custom paper, see page 17 "Registering
Custom Paper".
Accessing Tray Paper Settings
If the specified size differs from the actual size of the paper loaded in the paper tray, a misfeed might
occur because the correct paper size is not detected.
• If the specified paper type differs from the actual type of paper that is loaded in the paper tray, the
paper might misfeed, the toner might not fuse properly, or the print quality might be reduced.
Specifying a Custom Paper
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Select the tray to specify the paper settings.
3. Select [Allocate from Media Catalog].
The custom papers that can be used in the selected tray appear.
The Master Library information is indicated by the
icon.
If the paper you want to select is not displayed, use [Jump to Row], or scroll through the screen until
the desired item is displayed.
4. Select the custom paper that you want to use, and then press [Allocate to Tray].
After selecting a custom paper, you can check its type and color by pressing [Check Settings].
5. Press
.
6. Press [Home] (
152
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
Changing Tray Paper Settings
• If you want to change the custom paper settings, press [Change Custom Paper Sett.] in Step 5.
Manually specifying a paper's size and type
1. Press [Tray Paper Settings] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Select the tray to specify the paper settings.
3. Select [Manual Setting].
4. Press [Edit the Settings].
5. Change the paper settings, and then press [Save Paper].
You can configure the following items:
• [Paper Size]
• [Paper Weight]
• [Paper Type]
• [Apply Duplex]
• [Apply Auto Paper Select]
6. Press [Save].
7. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
Names and Positions of Paper Trays (Trays 1 to 8 and Tray A)
The optional units that your machine is equipped with determine the paper tray configuration.
153
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
1
2
3
4
5
3
4
6
5
7
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
EDD106
1. Tray 2
2. Tray 1
3. Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
4. Tray 3
5. Tray 4
6. Tray 5
7. Tray 6
8. Tray 7
9. Tray 8
Tray Paper Settings
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray 1 to 8, the multi bypass tray (Tray A), interposer
trays, and perfect binder interposer trays.
• If the specified size differs from the actual size of the paper loaded in the paper tray, a misfeed
might occur because the correct paper size is not detected.
• If you want to use preprinted paper, contact your service representative.
154
Changing Tray Paper Settings
Paper Tray
This section explains the paper tray settings in the [Paper Tray] menu under [Tray Paper Settings].
Trays 1 and 2
This section explains the paper tray settings for Trays 1 and 2.
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• Black
• Color
• Letterhead
• Preprinted Paper
• Prepunched Paper
• Transparency
• Tab Stock
• Tab Stock: Glossy
• Tab Stock: Matte
• Tab Stock: High Gloss
• Translucent Paper
• Label Paper
• Coated: Glossy
• Coated: Matte
• Coated: High Gloss
• Envelope
• Envelope: Glossy
• Envelope: Matte
• Envelope: High Gloss
• Textured Paper
• Magnet Paper
• Metallic/Pearl Paper
• Clear File Folder
• Synthetic Paper
• Carbonless Paper
Default: [Plain Paper]
155
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 7 (256.1–300.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 8 (300.1–350.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 9 (350.1–470.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Tab Stock], [Label Paper], [Translucent
Paper], [Magnet Paper], [Clear File Folder], [Carbonless Paper], or [Envelope] for [Paper
Type].
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, B6 , A6 , 11 × 17
, 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 ×
10 ,
71/4 × 101/2
, 51/2 × 81/2
10 × 15 , 10 × 14
, 8K , 16K
, 13 × 191/
13 × 18 , SRA3 , SRA4
41/5 × 51/2
5
, 12 × 18 , 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 ,
, 13 × 19 , 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 ,
, 226 × 310mm
, 310 × 432mm , 81/2 × 132/5 ,
Default: [Auto Detect]
You can specify a custom size between 100.0 and 330.2 mm (3.94 and 13.00 inches)
vertically, and between 139.7 and 487.7 mm (5.50 and 19.20 inches) horizontally.
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 129 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
• If you want to use glossy paper, select [Coated: Glossy] for [Paper Type]. If you want to use
matte paper (including silk, dull, and satin paper), select [Coated: Matte] for [Paper Type].
156
Changing Tray Paper Settings
Tray 3 to 8 (when the wide Large Capacity Tray is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for Tray 3 to 8 (when the wide LCT is installed).
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• Black
• Color
• Letterhead
• Preprinted Paper
• Transparency
• Tab Stock
• Tab Stock: Glossy
• Tab Stock: Matte
• Tab Stock: High Gloss
• Translucent Paper
• Label Paper
• Coated: Glossy
• Coated: Matte
• Coated: High Gloss
• Envelope
• Envelope: Glossy
• Prepunched Paper
• Envelope: Matte
• Envelope: High Gloss
• Textured Paper
• Magnet Paper
• Metallic/Pearl Paper
• Clear File Folder
• Synthetic Paper
• Carbonless Paper
Default: [Plain Paper]
If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
157
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 7 (256.1–300.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 8 (300.1–350.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 9 (350.1–470.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Tab Stock], [Translucent Paper],
[Magnet Paper], [Clear File Folder], [Carbonless Paper], [Label Paper], or [Envelope] for
[Paper Type].
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, B6 , A6 , 11 × 17
1
1
2
1
1
1
, 8 /2 × 14 , 8 /2 × 13 /5 , 8 /2 × 13 , 8 /2 × 11
, 8 /4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13
, 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2
, 51/2 × 81/2
, 8K , 16K
, 12 × 18 , 11 × 15 , 11 × 14 ,
10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 , 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 ,
13 × 18 , SRA3 , SRA4
, 226 × 310mm
, 310 × 432mm , 41/5 × 51/2
Default: [Auto Detect]
Specify the paper size with the number keys when you select [Custom Size]. The paper sizes
that can be used differ depending on the machine's configuration.
• When the banner sheet tray of wide LCT is not installed:
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm (3.94–13.00 inches), Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm (5.50–
19.20 inches)
• When the banner sheet tray of wide LCT is installed (Tray 3, 5, or 7):
Vertical: 210.0–330.2 mm (8.27–13.00 inches), Horizontal: 420.0–700.0 mm
(16.54–27.55 inches)
158
Changing Tray Paper Settings
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 129 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
• If you want to use glossy paper, select [Coated: Glossy] for [Paper Type]. If you want to use
matte paper (including silk, dull, and satin paper), select [Coated: Matte] for [Paper Type].
Multi bypass tray (Tray A)
This section explains the paper tray settings for multi bypass tray (Tray A).
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• Black
• Color
• Letterhead
• Preprinted Paper
• Prepunched Paper
• Transparency
• Tab Stock
• Translucent Paper
• Envelope
• Textured Paper
• Synthetic Paper
• Carbonless Paper
Default: [Plain Paper]
If you select [Tab Stock], you must configure the detailed settings.
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Apply Duplex
• Yes
• No
159
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
Default: [Yes]
Duplex printing is automatically disabled if you select [Translucent Paper], [Carbonless
Paper], [Envelope], or [Tab Stock] for [Paper Type].
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4
, 81/2 × 14
11 × 17
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 ,
, A5
, 81/2 × 132/5
8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2
, 51/2 × 81/2
11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14
, A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, 81/2 × 13
, 8K , 16K
, 13 × 191/5
123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 , SRA4
, 81/2 × 11
, B6 JIS ,
, 81/4 × 14
,
, 12 × 18 , 11 × 15 ,
, 13 × 19 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
, 226 × 310mm
, 310 × 432mm ,
41/5 × 51/2
Default: [Auto Detect]
Specify the paper size with the number keys when you select [Custom Size]. The paper sizes
that can be used differ depending on the machine's configuration.
• When the banner sheet tray of multi bypass tray (Tray A) is not installed:
Vertical: 100.0–330.2 mm (3.94–13.00 inches), Horizontal: 139.7–487.7 mm (5.50–
19.20 inches)
• When the banner sheet tray of multi bypass tray (Tray A) is installed:
Vertical: 210.0–330.2 mm (8.27–13.00 inches), Horizontal: 139.7–700.0 mm (5.50–
27.55 inches)
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 129 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
• The maximum weight of paper that can be loaded into the multi bypass tray (Tray A) is 220.0
g/m2 (80 lb. Cover).
Interposer Upper and Lower Tray (when Interposer CI5030 is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for the upper and lower trays of Interposer CI5030.
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4
, A5
, B4 JIS , B5 JIS
11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11
,
8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2
, 51/2 × 81/2
,
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13
, 8K , 16K
, 12 × 18 , 11 × 15 ,
11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 13 × 191/5 , 13 × 19 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 , SRA4
Default: [Auto Detect]
160
, 226 × 310mm
, 310 × 432mm
Changing Tray Paper Settings
You can specify a custom size between 139.7 and 330.2 mm (5.50 and 13.00 inches)
vertically, and between 139.7 and 487.7 mm (5.50 and 19.20 inches) horizontally.
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 129 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
Interposer Upper and Lower Tray (when Interposer CI5040 is installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for the upper and lower trays of Interposer CI5040.
Paper Type
• Plain Paper
• Recycled Paper
• Black
• Color
• Letterhead
• Preprinted Paper
• Transparency
• Tab Stock
• Translucent Paper
• Label Paper
• Coated: High Gloss
• Coated: Glossy
• Coated: Matte
• Prepunched Paper
• Textured Paper
• Metallic/Pearl Paper
• Synthetic Paper
• Tab Stock: Glossy
• Tab Stock: Matte
• Tab Stock: High Gloss
Default: [Plain Paper]
Paper Weight
• Paper Weight 1 (52.3–63.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 3 (80.1–105.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 4 (105.1–163.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 5 (163.1–220.0g/m2)
161
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
• Paper Weight 6 (220.1–256.0g/m2)
• Paper Weight 7 (256.1–300.0g/m2)
Default: [Paper Weight 2 (63.1–80.0g/m2)]
Paper Size
Custom Size, Auto Detect, A3 , A4
, 81/2 × 14
11 × 17
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 ,
, A5
, 81/2 × 132/5
8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2
, 51/2 × 81/2
11 × 14 , 10 × 15 , 10 × 14
, B4 JIS , B5 JIS
, 81/
2 × 13
, 81/2 × 11
, 8K , 16K
, 13 × 191/5
,
, 81/4 × 14 ,
, 12 × 18 , 11 × 15 ,
, 13 × 19 , 123/5 × 191/5 ,
123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 , SRA4
Default: [Auto Detect]
Specify the paper size with the number keys when you select [Custom Size]. You can specify a
custom size between 139.7 and 330.2 mm (5.50 and 13.00 inches) vertically, and between
139.7 and 487.7 mm (5.50 and 19.20 inches) horizontally.
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 129 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
Perfect Binder Interposer Upper and Lower Tray (when the perfect binder interposer is
installed)
This section explains the paper tray settings for the upper and lower trays of the perfect binder
interposer.
Paper Size
Auto Detect, A3 , B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 8K , 12 × 18 , 11 × 15 , 13 × 191/5 ,
13 × 19 , 123/5 × 191/5 , 123/5 × 181/2 , 13 × 18 , SRA3 , 310 × 432mm ,
Custom Size
Default: [Auto Detect]
You can specify a custom size between 257.0 and 330.2 mm (10.12 and 13.00 inches)
vertically, and between 364.0 and 487.7 mm (14.34 and 19.20 inches) horizontally.
For details about auto detectable paper sizes, see page 129 "Recommended Paper Sizes
and Types".
162
Changing Tray Paper Settings
Using the Ring Binder and the High Capacity Stacker
Using the ring binder
Removing bound booklets from the ring binder tray
• Keep your hands clear of the inside of the ring binder and the space under the ring binder
tray. You can trap your fingers if you do not.
• Be sure not to exit from Energy Saver mode or to switch the machine on when the ring binder
door is open and the binding unit is disconnected. Doing so will affect initialization, causing
the ring binder function to become unavailable (although other functions will be unaffected).
• If you inadvertently do this, connect the ring binder's binding unit again, close the door, and
then turn the power off and back on to restore normal operation.
Pull out the ring
binder tray.
Remove bound
booklets.
Slide the ring binder
tray fully in carefully.
CGH014
• Before pulling out the ring binder tray, make sure the machine is not in operation.
• When removing bound booklets from the ring binder tray, be careful not to catch the rings on
the machine.
Inserting pages into an existing ring bound booklet
• When binding paper manually with the ring opener, take care not to trap or injure fingers.
163
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
You can use the ring stand and ring opener to insert new pages into the existing ring bound
booklets. Use these devices when you need to insert covers, replace existing pages, or add new
pages.
1
2
CET031
1. Ring stand
2. Ring opener
1. Punch holes into the pages that you want to insert into the ring bound booklet.
2. With the ring bound booklet closed, place the ring comb on the ring stand so that
each of the rings is in a groove on the stand.
CET032
3. Insert the spine of the ring comb into the fixing lug of the ring stand. Gently press
down on the ring comb to lock it into place.
CET033
164
Changing Tray Paper Settings
4. Open the bound booklet to where you want to insert the new pages, and then place
one of your hands on the ring stand.
CET034
5. Insert the sharp end of the ring opener into one end of the ring comb, and then push
it all the way through the ring comb.
CET035
The rings of the comb will open as you push the ring opener through them.
6. Insert the new pages.
7. Holding the sides of the ring opener, carefully press down the opened rings.
To close a 50-sheet type binding ring comb, use the side of the ring opener that has the
smaller grooves.
To close a 100-sheet type binding ring comb, use the side of the ring opener that has the
larger grooves.
165
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
CET036
The rings of the comb will close as you press down with the ring opener.
8. Remove the ring comb from the ring stand.
• When using the ring opener, take care to avoid injuring self or others and damaging nearby
equipment.
Using the high capacity stacker
Stacker control panel
The high capacity stacker has a control panel that you can use to lower the stacker tray and
confirm the status of the high capacity stacker.
1
2
4
3
5
7
6
CGH007
1. Tray Moving Indicator
This flashes blue when the stacker tray is moving up or down. When the stacker tray has moved all the
way up and is in the standby state, the indicator turns off. When the stacker tray has moved all the way
down, the indicator lights up blue.
2. Lower Tray Button
Press this button to lower the tray. The tray cannot move if the stacker front cover is open.
166
Changing Tray Paper Settings
3. Paper Jam Button
This is lit red when a paper jam occurs. Pressing this button lowers the stacker tray into the paper
removal position.
4. Cover of the Stacker Control Panel
5. Stacker Collecting Indicator
This flashes blue when the stacker tray is collecting output paper.
6. Stacker Full Indicator
This is lit red when the stacker tray is full.
7. Error Indicator
This is lit to indicate one or more of the following errors:
• The handcart is not properly set.
• The stacker front cover is open.
• Jammed paper is still inside the high capacity stacker.
Removing paper
• Use the stacker cart for transporting paper from the high capacity stacker. Do not use the
stacker cart for any other purpose.
• Do not attempt to get inside the high capacity stacker.
• The paper press might leave a mark on the top of the paper stack. To prevent this, put several
sheets of unwanted paper or a protective sheet between the paper press and the paper stack.
1. Open the cover of the stacker control panel, and then press the lower tray button.
CET019
To stop the lowering stacker tray, press the lower tray button again.
To resume lowering the tray, open and close the stacker front cover, and then press the lower
tray button again after the tray has risen completely.
When the stacker tray is fully lowered, the tray moving indicator stops flashing and remains lit.
167
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
2. Open the stacker front cover.
DER105
3. Carefully pull out the stacker cart.
DER106
Take care not to let the paper stack topple.
4. Rest the paper press on top of the paper stack.
CET022
168
Changing Tray Paper Settings
5. Pull the lever on the paper press toward you.
CET023
6. Transport the paper to where it is required, and then unload the stacker cart.
7. Return the paper press to its original position.
CET024
8. Put the stacker cart back inside the high capacity stacker.
DER107
Be careful to push the stacker cart in straight, not at an angle.
169
5. Paper Specifications and Adding Paper
DER108
9. Close the stacker front cover.
The stacker tray begins elevating automatically and the tray moving indicator begins flashing.
When the tray moving indicator stops flashing, the tray is fully elevated.
• Before moving the high capacity stacker, be sure to take the stacker cart out of the high
capacity stacker.
170
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
This section explains Adjustment Settings for Operators and how to specify them.
How to Use the [Adjustment Settings for
Operators] Screen
This section explains how to use the Adjustment Settings for Operators.
1
2
3
To Print Screen
4
5
DWQ560
1.
Press this key to collapse the hierarchical display of the adjustment items, and display only the group names of
those items.
2. [Reset]
Press this key to reset the settings/modifications being currently configured. The settings/modifications cannot
be reset after you press [Apply].
3. [Apply]
Press this key to apply the settings/modifications.
4. Adjustment items
Adjustment items are displayed in this area. When you select an item, its configuration screen will then open.
5. Configuration screen
Configure or modify the settings of the adjustment item that you have selected.
171
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Accessing the Adjustment Settings for
Operators
1. Press [Adjustment Settings for Operators] at the upper left of the screen.
2. Select and change adjustment settings.
The method for changing the selected adjustment setting depends on the setting that you want to
change. For details, see page 172 "Features of the Displayed Items and Setting Operations".
3. Press [Apply].
4. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
Features of the Displayed Items and Setting Operations
The following operations are available for each adjustment item:
• Value setting
• Item setting
• Executing
• Display only
Value setting
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the value respectively, or use the numeric keypad to enter
the value.
For some settings, move the slider right or left to increase or decrease the setting value.
172
Accessing the Adjustment Settings for Operators
A numeric keypad appears to the left when you press the input box. Use the keypad to enter a
value.
• [×]: Press to delete the entered value character by character.
• [Clear]: Clear the entered value.
• [+/-]: Change the sign of the entered value from + (positive) to - (negative) and vice versa.
• [Enter]: Confirm the entered value.
For some items, you can select a value from the pull-down list that appears when you press the
input box. Select a value from the list.
Item setting
Select the item you require.
173
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Executing
Press [Execute] to perform a selected function.
Display Only
You can check the setting of the selected item.
Printing with Adjusted Settings
To print with the settings you have adjusted, be sure to select the paper tray and paper size to which the
settings apply.
• Settings adjustable for each paper tray
• Settings adjustable for each paper size
Settings adjustable for each paper tray
These are settings adjustable for each paper tray.
Print jobs are processed with the adjusted settings when printing from a tray with the applied
settings.
174
Accessing the Adjustment Settings for Operators
Settings adjustable for each paper size
These are settings adjustable for each paper size.
Print jobs are processed with the adjusted settings when printing with a paper size that has the
applied settings.
• For details about selecting the paper tray and paper size for printing, see the manuals for the
related functions.
175
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Menu Items and Functions
Machine: Image Position
For details about the following items, see page 185 "Machine: Image Position".
No.
Item
Description
0101
Image Position: With Feed:
Side 1
Adjust the image position (left and right) on side 1 along
the feeding direction.
0102
Image Position: With Feed:
Side 2
Adjust the image position (left and right) on side 2 along
the feeding direction.
0103
Image Position: Across
Feed: Side 1
Adjust the image position (up and down) on side 1
across the feeding direction.
0104
Image Position: Across
Feed: Side 2
Adjust the image position (up and down) on side 2
across the feeding direction.
0105
Image Magnification: With
Feed: Side 1
Adjust the horizontal image scaling to print on Side 1 of
the paper according to the paper expansion or
shrinkage.
0106
Image Magnification: With
Feed: Side 2
Adjust the horizontal image scaling to print on Side 2 of
the paper according to the paper expansion or
shrinkage.
0107
Image Magnification:
Across Feed: Side 1
Adjust the vertical image scaling to print on Side 1 of the
paper according to the paper expansion or shrinkage.
0108
Image Magnification:
Across Feed: Side 2
Adjust the vertical image scaling to print on Side 2 of the
paper according to the paper expansion or shrinkage.
0109
Perpendicularity
Adjustment
Adjust the image skew (perpendicularity) across the
feeding direction.
0110
Switch Paper Edge
Detection Sensor
Specify the level for detecting the paper edge for
correcting the image position along the feeding
direction.
Machine: Image Quality
For details about the following items, see page 194 "Machine: Image Quality".
176
Menu Items and Functions
No.
Item
Description
0201
Execute Image Quality
Adjustment
Execute image control or color registration adjustment
manually.
0202
Maximum Image Density
Adjust the toner adhesion amount to the intermediate
transfer belt during the image density adjustment.
0203
Line Width
Adjust the intensity of the laser for rasterizing the image
data.
Machine: Paper Feed/ Output
For details about the following items, see page 196 "Machine: Paper Feed/ Output".
No.
Item
Description
0301
Correct Output Paper Curl:
1 Sided: Face Up
Specify the method for straightening paper curls on 1sided face-up output sheets.
0302
Correct Output Paper Curl:
1 Sided: Face Down
Specify the method for straightening paper curls on 1sided face-down output sheets.
0303
Correct Output Paper Curl:
2 Sided
Specify the method for straightening paper curls on 2sided output sheets.
0304
Detect JAM099
Specify whether or not to detect double feed (multi-sheet
feeding). This setting is invalid when you are printing
from the tray for which custom paper is allocated.
0305
Detect JAM080
Specify whether or not to detect error as a paper jam
when the image deviation in the feeding direction
exceeds a certain degree.
0306
Detect J097/098
Specify whether or not to detect error as a paper jam
when a deviation or paper skew across the feeding
direction is detected.
0307
Control J097/098
Specify whether or not to correct an image position and
skew across the feeding direction.
0308
Detect JAM048
Specify whether or not to detect an error as a paper jam
when a problem is detected while the registration mark
is checked for image position correction.
177
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Machine: Maintenance
For details about the following items, see page 201 "Machine: Maintenance".
No.
Item
Description
0505
Temperature / Humidity
Inside
Display the internal temperature and humidity.
0506
Temperature / Humidity
Outside
Display the external temperature and humidity.
0507
Screw-on Cap to Replace
Close the Toner Bottle Cap.
Open the toner bottle cover (the cover of the toner
dispensing section) before executing this function.
Afterward, remove the toner bottle by pushing the knob
below the bottle.
0508
Execute Developer
Refreshing
The machine uses degraded toner in the development
unit and adds new toner from the toner bottle.
0509
Execute Photoconductor
Refreshing
Remove dust on the drum surface.
0510
Execute Charger Unit
Cleaning
Cleans the Charge Unit.
0512
Fusing Belt Smoothing
Setting
Specify the condition to execute Fuser Belt smoothing.
0513
Smooth Fusing Belt
Smooth the Fuser Belt to remove vertical and horizontal
lines from the printouts.
0516
Manage Multiple Fusing
Units by Counter
Display the counter of Fusing Unit parts.
Finishing: Finisher
For details about the following items, see page 205 "Finishing: Finisher".
No.
0601
178
Item
Staple Position: Across
Feed 1
Description
Adjust the vertical position of the staple (applied at an
edge) when using Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher
SR5060.
Menu Items and Functions
No.
Item
Description
0602
Staple Position: Across
Feed 2
Adjust the vertical position of the staples (dual) when
using Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
0603
Staple Position: With Feed
Adjust the horizontal position of the staples when using
Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
0604
Paper Alignment for
Stapling: Across Feed
Adjust the width of the Staple Jogger*1 when using the
staple function on Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher
SR5060.
0605
Paper Alignment for
Stapling: With Feed
Adjust the Tip Stopper movement when using the staple
function applied at an angle on Finisher SR5050 or
Booklet Finisher SR5060.
0606
Number of Sheets Align for
Stapling
Specify the number of sheets to align for stapling at one
time.
0607
Punch Position: Across
Feed
Adjust the vertical position of the punch holes when using
Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
0608
Punch Position: With Feed
Adjust the horizontal position of the punch holes when
using Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
0609
Punch Skew Correction
Specify whether or not to correct the punch skew when
using Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
0610
Amount of Punch Skew
Correction
Adjust the level of skew correction when using Finisher
SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
0611
Paper Alignment in Shift
Tray Setting
Specify the alignment precision of output sheets during
Shift Sorting when using Finisher SR5050 or Booklet
Finisher SR5060.
0612
Paper Alignment in Shift
Tray: Across Feed
Adjust the width of Paper Alignment Jogger*1 on the
Shift Tray when sheets are ejected and delivered to the
Shift Tray of Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher
SR5060.
0613
Output Tray Descending
Position
Specify the tray descent range according to the paper
weight when sheets are ejected and delivered to the Shift
Tray of Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
0614
Exit Guide Close Timing
Specify the timing to close the Paper Exit Guide when
sheets are ejected and delivered to the Shift Tray of
Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
179
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
No.
180
Item
Description
0615
Output Trail Edge Press
Setting
Specify whether or not to hold the trailing edge of sheets
when they are ejected and delivered to the Shift Tray of
Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
0616
Output Fan Setting
Specify the fan operation to the sheets on the Shift Tray
when sheets are ejected and delivered to the Shift Tray
of Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
0617
Output Fan Level
Specify the air flow of the fan on the Shift Tray when
sheets are ejected and delivered to the Shift Tray of
Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
0618
Staple Position for Booklet
Adjust the horizontal position of the booklet staples when
using Booklet Finisher SR5060.
0619
Folding Position for Booklet
Adjust the horizontal position of the folding when using
Booklet Finisher SR5060.
0620
Paper Alignment for
Booklet: Across Feed
Adjust the width of the Staple Jogger*1 when using
Booklet Finisher SR5060.
0621
Set Number of Folds for
Booklet
Specify the number of booklet folds to be performed
when using Booklet Finisher SR5060.
0622
Paper Alignment for
Booklet: With Feed
Adjust the Tip Stopper movement when using the booklet
binding function on Booklet Finisher SR5060.
0623
Z-fold Skew Correction
Select the method to correct the skew during Z-folding on
the fold unit.
0624
Amount of Z-fold Skew
Correction
Adjust the striking amount of paper during Z-folding
skew correction.
0625
Amount of Z-fold Skew
Correction: Reverse
Adjust the reverse rotation amount of Registration Roller
during Z-folding skew correction.
0626
Maximum No. Stacked
Sheets in Output Tray
Specify the number of sheets to stack on the Shift Tray at
the time of shift sorting.
0630
Staple Position for Booklet
Adjust the horizontal position of the booklet staples when
using Booklet Finisher SR5120.
0631
Folding Position for Booklet
Adjust the horizontal position of the folding when using
Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Menu Items and Functions
No.
Item
Description
0632
Staple Position: Across
Feed 1
Adjust the vertical position of the staple (applied at an
edge) when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher
SR5120.
0633
Staple Position: Across
Feed 2
Adjust the vertical distance (up and down) between the
staples (dual) when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet
Finisher SR5120.
0634
Staple Position: With Feed
Adjust the horizontal position of the staples when using
Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
0635
Punch Position: Across
Feed
Adjust the vertical position of the punch holes when using
Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
0636
Punch Position: With Feed
Adjust the horizontal position of the punch holes when
using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
0638
Set Number of Folds for
Booklet
Specify the number of booklet folds to be performed
when using Booklet Finisher SR5120.
0666
Staple Tray: Rib Installed
Mode to Strengthen Paper
Set the operation when the Paper Strengthening Rib is
installed to Staple Tray when using Finisher SR5110 or
Booklet Finisher SR5120.
0667
Accuracy Priority for
Stapling
Set the accuracy priority for stapling when using Finisher
SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
0668
Accuracy Priority for
Booklet
Set the accuracy priority for a booklet when using
Booklet Finisher SR5120.
*1 A guide for aligning output sheets. Paper is aligned at both ends.
Finishing: Fold
For details about the following items, see page 230 "Finishing: Fold".
No.
0701
0702
0703
Item
Description
Z-fold Position 1
Adjust the fold position of the end segment when using
the fold unit.
Z-fold Position 2
Adjust the overall fold size of the Z-foldout sheets when
using the fold unit.
Half Fold Position: 1 sheet
Fold
Adjust the fold position of the half folded sheets (1 sheet
fold) when using the fold unit.
181
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
No.
Item
Description
0704
Half Fold Position: Multisheet Fold
0705
Letter Fold-out Position 1: 1 Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment of letter
sheet Fold
foldout sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
0706
Letter Fold-out Position 1:
Multi-sheet Fold
0707
Letter Fold-out Position 2: 1 Adjust the overall fold size of letter foldout sheets (1
sheet Fold
sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
0708
Letter Fold-out Position 2:
Multi-sheet Fold
Adjust the overall fold size of letter foldout sheets
(multisheet fold) when using the fold unit.
0709
Letter Fold-in Position 1: 1
sheet Fold
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment of letter
fold-in sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
0710
Letter Fold-in Position 1:
Multi-sheet Fold
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment of letter
fold-in sheets (multisheet fold) when using the fold unit.
0711
Letter Fold-in Position 2: 1
sheet Fold
Adjust the inner fold size of letter fold-in sheets (1 sheet
fold) when using the fold unit.
0712
Letter Fold-in Position 2:
Multi-sheet Fold
Adjust the inner fold size of letter fold-in sheets
(multisheet fold) when using the fold unit.
0713
Double Parallel Fold
Position 1
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment 1 of
double parallel-folded sheets when using the fold unit.
0714
Double Parallel Fold
Position 2
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment 2 of
double parallel-folded sheets when using the fold unit.
Gate Fold Position 1
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment 1 of
gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.
Gate Fold Position 2
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment 2 of
gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.
Gate Fold Position 3
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment 3 of
gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.
0715
0716
0717
Adjust the fold position of the half folded sheets
(multisheet fold) when using the fold unit.
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment of letter
foldout sheets (multisheet fold) when using the fold unit.
Finishing: Perfect Binder
For details about the following items, see page 247 "Finishing: Perfect Binder".
182
Menu Items and Functions
No.
Item
Description
0801
Perf Bind Cvr Sht Posit:
Across Feed
Adjust the vertical alignment of the cover sheet position
when performing perfect binding.
0802
Perf Bind Cvr Sht Posit:
With Feed
Adjust the horizontal alignment of the cover sheet
position when performing perfect binding.
0803
Perfect Binding Finishing
Angle
Square the top, bottom, and outside edges when
trimming a deck of paper.
0804
Applying Binding Glue
Adjust the amount of binding glue for perfect binding.
Finishing: Stacker
For details about the following items, see page 249 "Finishing: Stacker".
No.
Item
Description
0901
Ppr Align in Stack Tray: Acr Adjust the alignment width in Main Jogger*1 when
Feed 1
output sheets are stacked on the stacker.
0902
Ppr Align in Stack Tray: Acr Adjust the alignment width in Sub Jogger*1 when output
Feed 2
sheets are stacked on the stacker.
0903
Paper Alignment in Stacker
Tray: With Feed
Adjust the alignment position of the Tip Stopper when
output sheets are ejected on the Stacker.
0904
Ppr Align in 2nd Stack
Tray: Acr Feed 1
Adjust the alignment width in Main Jogger*1 when
output sheets are stacked on the 2nd stacker.
0905
Ppr Align in 2nd Stack
Tray: Acr Feed 2
Adjust the alignment width in Sub Jogger*1 when output
sheets are stacked on the 2nd stacker.
0906
Ppr Align in 2nd Stack
Tray: With Feed
Adjust the alignment position of the Tip Stopper when
output sheets are ejected on the 2nd stacker.
0907
Maximum Stack Quantity
in Stacker Tray
Specify the maximum number of sheets that can be
stacked on the stacker tray. The setting applies to both
the 1st and 2nd stackers.
Density Difference Printing: Across Feed
For details about the following items, see page 254 "Density Difference Printing: Across Feed".
183
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
No.
Item
1000
Density Difference Printing:
Across Feed
Description
To reduce image density diff.
Finishing: Interposer
For details about the following items, see page 255 "Finishing: Interposer".
No.
Item
Description
2101
Detect JAM573
Set ON / OFF for JAM573 (detection of multi feed).
2101
Detect JAM574
Set ON / OFF for JAM574 (detection of multi feed).
*1 A guide for aligning output sheets. Paper is aligned at both ends.
• The items displayed in Adjustment Settings for Operators vary depending on the machine's option
configuration and device status.
184
Setting Values
Setting Values
Machine: Image Position
0101 Image Position: With Feed: Side 1
Adjust the image position (left and right) on side 1 along the feeding direction.
Press [ ] to shift the image position to the right (toward the bottom edge), or press [ ] to shift the
position to the left (toward the leading edge).
Paper feed direction
Top
Right
(Trailing Edge)
Left
(Leading Edge)
Bottom
CWY006
Setting Items
Tray 1
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.00
3.00
-3.00
0.01
mm
Tray 2
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 3
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 4
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 5
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 6
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 7
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 8
Bypass Tray
Extended Option Tray
• If sheets are delivered face down, turn them over horizontally and check the image position.
185
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
• If the leading-edge margin on the side 1 of the paper is too narrow, paper jams may occur.
• If the trailing-edge margin on the side 1 of the paper is too narrow, paper jams may occur when
printing on the back in duplex printing.
Leading-edge margin
Trailing-edge margin
Paper feed direction
CWY015
• This setting is not effective for paper fed from paper trays with custom paper presets. For such
paper, the value specified in [Image Position: Side1] in [Advanced Settings] takes precedence.
0102 Image Position: With Feed: Side 2
Adjust the image position (left and right) on side 2 along the feeding direction.
Press [ ] to shift the image position to the left (toward the bottom edge), or press [ ] to shift the position
to the right (toward the leading edge).
Paper feed direction
Top
Right
(Leading Edge)
Left
(Trailing Edge)
Bottom
CWY014
186
Setting Values
Setting Items
Tray 1
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.00
3.00
-3.00
0.01
mm
Tray 2
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 3
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 4
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 5
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 6
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 7
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 8
Bypass Tray
Extended Option Tray
• If sheets are delivered face down, turn them over horizontally and check the image position.
• This setting is not effective for paper fed from paper trays with custom paper presets. For such
paper, the value specified in [Image Position: Side2] in [Advanced Settings] takes precedence.
0103 Image Position: Across Feed: Side 1
Adjust the image position (up and down) on side 1 across the feeding direction.
Press [ ] or [ ] to shift the image position upward (toward the back) or downward (toward the front).
Paper feed direction
Top
Right
(Trailing Edge)
Left
(Leading Edge)
Bottom
DGH005
187
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
Tray 1
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.00
3.00
-3.00
0.01
mm
Tray 2
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 3
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 4
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 5
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 6
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 7
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 8
Bypass Tray
Extended Option Tray
• If sheets are delivered face down, turn them over horizontally and check the image position.
• This setting is not effective for paper fed from paper trays with custom paper presets. For such
paper, the value specified in [Image Position: Side1] in [Advanced Settings] takes precedence.
0104 Image Position: Across Feed: Side 2
Adjust the image position (up and down) on side 2 across the feeding direction.
Press [ ] or [ ] to shift the image position upward (toward the back) or downward (toward the front).
Paper feed direction
Top
Right
(Trailing Edge)
Left
(Leading Edge)
Bottom
DGH006
188
Setting Values
Setting Items
Tray 1
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.00
3.00
-3.00
0.01
mm
Tray 2
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 3
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 4
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 5
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 6
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 7
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 8
Bypass Tray
Extended Option Tray
• If sheets are delivered face down, turn them over horizontally and check the image position.
• This setting is not effective for paper fed from paper trays with custom paper presets. For such
paper, the value specified in [Image Position: Side2] in [Advanced Settings] takes precedence.
0105 Image Magnification: With Feed: Side 1
Adjust the horizontal image scaling to print on Side 1/2 of the paper according to the paper expansion
or shrinkage.
189
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
Tray 1
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.000
0.500
-0.500
0.025
%
Tray 2
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 3
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 4
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 5
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 6
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 7
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 8
Bypass Tray
Extended Option Tray
• Depending on the setup, the print side with respect to the delivery and paper feed directions may
vary.
• This setting is not effective for paper fed from paper trays with custom paper presets.
0106 Image Magnification: With Feed: Side 2
Adjust the horizontal image scaling to print on Side 1/2 of the paper according to the paper expansion
or shrinkage.
190
Setting Values
Setting Items
Tray 1
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.000
0.500
-0.500
0.025
%
Tray 2
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 3
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 4
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 5
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 6
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 7
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 8
Bypass Tray
Extended Option Tray
• Depending on the setup, the print side with respect to the delivery and paper feed directions may
vary.
• This setting is not effective for paper fed from paper trays with custom paper presets.
0107 Image Magnification: Across Feed: Side 1
Adjust the vertical image scaling to print on Side 1/2 of the paper according to the paper expansion or
shrinkage.
191
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
Tray 1
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.000
0.500
-0.500
0.001
%
Tray 2
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 3
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 4
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 5
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 6
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 7
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 8
Bypass Tray
Extended Option Tray
• Depending on the setup, the print side with respect to the delivery and paper feed directions may
vary.
• This setting is not effective for paper fed from paper trays with custom paper presets.
0108 Image Magnification: Across Feed: Side 2
Adjust the vertical image scaling to print on Side 1/2 of the paper according to the paper expansion or
shrinkage.
192
Setting Values
Setting Items
Tray 1
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.000
0.500
-0.500
0.001
%
Tray 2
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 3
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 4
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 5
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 6
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 7
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 8
Bypass Tray
Extended Option Tray
• Depending on the setup, the print side with respect to the delivery and paper feed directions may
vary.
• This setting is not effective for paper fed from paper trays with custom paper presets.
0109 Perpendicularity Adjustment
Adjust the image skew (perpendicularity) across the feeding direction.
Press [ ] or [ ] to tilt the image to the left (toward the top) or right (toward the bottom).
Default
Paper feed direction
DWP569
Setting Items
Correction Value
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0
20
-20
1
-
193
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
• After performing Perpendicularity Adjustment, execute [Color Registration] under 0201 [Execute
Image Quality Adjustment] in Adjustment Settings for Operators.
0110 Switch Paper Edge Detection Sensor
Specify the level for detecting the paper edge for correcting the image position along the feeding
direction.
Setting Items
Selection
Tray 1
Normal
Tray 2
High Accuracy
Default Value
Normal
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 3
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 4
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 5
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 6
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 7
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 8
Bypass Tray
Extended Option Tray
• Select [High Accuracy] only when blank paper is fed. Otherwise, a paper jam may occur.
Machine: Image Quality
0201 Execute Image Quality Adjustment
Execute image control or color registration adjustment manually.
The machine adjusts the image density. The time required for each process is as follows: about 5 minutes
for [Adjust All], about 1.5 minutes for [Adjust Image Density], about 1 minute for [Density Difference: Acr
Fd], about 2.5 minutes for [Density Difference: With Fd], and about 40 seconds for [Color Registration].
A message appears on the control panel while the process is in progress. Do not pull out the mainframe
front covers while the message is being displayed.
194
Setting Values
Setting Items
Values
Adjust All
Press [Execute].
Adjust Image Density
Density Difference: Acr Fd
Density Difference: With Fd
Color Registration
• The machine executes automatic image quality adjustment after a set interval or after printing a
specified number of sheets. However, you can also manually initiate automatic image density
adjustment whenever you want.
0202 Maximum Image Density
Adjust the toner adhesion amount to the intermediate transfer belt during the image density adjustment.
When the degree of coloration differs depending on the difference in the degree of pigmentation, adjust
the toner adhesion amount.
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the toner adhesion amount.
If you change the setting value, [Adjust Image Density] is automatically performed before the machine
starts printing.
Setting Items
Black
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0
5
-5
1
-
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
• Increasing the toner adhesion might reduce fusibility, causing toner splatter or distorted text and
thin lines.
0203 Line Width
Adjust the intensity of the laser for rasterizing the image data.
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the intensity.
195
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
If you change the setting value, [Adjust Image Density] is automatically performed before the machine
starts printing.
Setting Items
Black
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0
5
-5
1
-
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
• Screen dots and hairline width become thicker when you increase the intensity.
Machine: Paper Feed/ Output
0301 Correct Output Paper Curl: 1 Sided: Face Up
Specify the method for straightening paper curls on 1-sided face-up output sheets. Select the method
according to the direction and degree of curl. If the paper is curled face up, select "U Curl". If it is curled
face down, select "П Curl". Depending on how much the paper is curled, specify the degree of
correction by selecting "Small", "Medium", or "Large".
Setting Items
Selection
Tray 1
Off
Tray 2
П Curl Correction
Level: Small
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 3
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 4
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 5
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 6
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 7
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 8
Bypass Tray
Extended Option Tray
П Curl Correction
Level: Medium
П Curl Correction
Level: Large
U Curl Correction
Level: Small
U Curl Correction
Level: Medium
U Curl Correction
Level: Large
196
Default Value
Off
Setting Values
0302 Correct Output Paper Curl: 1 Sided: Face Down
Specify the method for straightening paper curls on 1-sided face-down output sheets.
Select the method according to the direction and degree of curl. If the paper is curled face up, select "U
Curl". If it is curled face down, select "П Curl".
Depending on how much the paper is curled, specify the degree of correction by selecting "Small",
"Medium", or "Large".
Setting Items
Selection
Tray 1
Off
Tray 2
П Curl Correction
Level: Small
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 3
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 4
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 5
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 6
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 7
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 8
Bypass Tray
Extended Option Tray
Default Value
Off
П Curl Correction
Level: Medium
П Curl Correction
Level: Large
U Curl Correction
Level: Small
U Curl Correction
Level: Medium
U Curl Correction
Level: Large
0303 Correct Output Paper Curl: 2 Sided
Specify the method for straightening paper curls on 2-sided output sheets.
Select the method according to the direction and degree of curl. If the paper is curled face up, select "U
Curl". If it is curled face down, select "П Curl".
Depending on how much the paper is curled, specify the degree of correction by selecting "Small",
"Medium", or "Large".
197
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
Selection
Tray 1
Off
Tray 2
П Curl Correction
Level: Small
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 3
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 4
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 5
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 6
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 7
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 8
Bypass Tray
Extended Option Tray
Default Value
Off
П Curl Correction
Level: Medium
П Curl Correction
Level: Large
U Curl Correction
Level: Small
U Curl Correction
Level: Medium
U Curl Correction
Level: Large
0304 Detect JAM099
Specify whether or not to detect double feed (multi-sheet feeding).
If this is set to [On], the machine can detect double feeding, which prevents blank sheets turning up in
the delivered paper.
The machine may erroneously detect double feeding when using special paper (double-layer paper,
such as label paper). If such erroneous detection occurs, set this to [Off].
This setting is invalid when you are printing from the tray for which custom paper is allocated. For such
paper, the value specified in [Detect JAM099] in [Advanced Settings] takes precedence.
198
Setting Values
Setting Items
Selection
Tray 1
Off
Tray 2
On
Default Value
On
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 3
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 4
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 5
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 6
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 7
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 8
Bypass Tray
Extended Option Tray
0305 Detect JAM080
Specify whether or not to detect error as a paper jam when the image deviation in the feeding direction
exceeds a certain degree.
Setting Items
Values
Tray 1
Off
Tray 2
On
Default Value
On
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 3
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 4
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 5
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 6
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 7
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 8
Bypass Tray
Extended Option Tray
0306 Detect J097/098
Specify whether or not to detect error as a paper jam when a deviation or paper skew across the
feeding direction is detected.
199
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
Values
Tray 1
Off
Tray 2
On
Default Value
On
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 3
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 4
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 5
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 6
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 7
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 8
Bypass Tray
Extended Option Tray
0307 Control J097/098
Specify whether or not to correct an image position and skew across the feeding direction.
Setting Items
Values
Tray 1
Off
Tray 2
On
Default Value
On
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 3
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 4
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 5
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 6
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 7
2-Tray LCIT: Tray 8
Bypass Tray
Extended Option Tray
0308 Detect JAM048
Specify whether or not to detect an error as a paper jam when a problem is detected while the
registration mark is checked for image position correction.
200
Setting Values
Setting Items
Settting
Values
Off
Default Value
On
On
Machine: Maintenance
0505 Temperature / Humidity Inside
Display the internal temperature and humidity.
Report this information if your service representative requests it.
Setting Items
PCU 1 Temperature
Remarks
Value display only.
PCU 1 Humidity
PCU 2 Temperature
PCU 2 Humidity
0506 Temperature / Humidity Outside
Display the external temperature and humidity.
Report this information if your service representative requests it.
Setting Items
Temperature
Remarks
Value display only.
Humidity
0507 Screw-on Cap to Replace
Close the Toner Bottle Cap.
The Toner Bottle in use can be pulled out when the Cap is closed. Use it when you want to replace the
Toner Bottle.
201
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
Description
Black 1
Press [Execute] to execute the function.
Black 2
Open the toner bottle cover (the cover of the
toner dispensing section) before executing this
function.
Cyan 1
Cyan 2
Afterward, remove the toner bottle by pushing
the knob below the bottle.
Magenta 1
Magenta 2
Yellow 1
Yellow 2
0508 Execute Developer Refreshing
The machine uses degraded toner in the development unit and adds new toner from the toner bottle.
Refresh the toner for print jobs if:
• Background is dirty
• White spots appear
• Density is uneven
• Black parts are faded
Setting Items
All Colors
Values
Press [Execute].
Black
0509 Execute Photoconductor Refreshing
Remove dust on the drum surface.
This operation takes about four minutes. Do not open the right or left mainframe front cover during
operation.
Setting Items
Execute
0510 Execute Charger Unit Cleaning
Cleans the Charge Unit.
202
Selection
Press [Execute].
Setting Values
Execute this function when vertical streaks appear on the printed page.
Setting Items
Description
All Colors
Press [Execute] to execute the function.
Black
Keep the front cover of the main unit closed until
the process is completed.
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
0512 Fusing Belt Smoothing Setting
Specify the condition to execute Fuser Belt smoothing.
Setting Items
Auto Exe: Belt Scratches
Selection
Off
Frequently (With
Density Adj)
Default Value
Frequently (With
Density Adj)
More Frequently
Most Frequently
Feed Speed
High
Low 3
Middle
Low 1
Low 2
Low 3
0513 Smooth Fusing Belt
Smooth the Fuser Belt to remove vertical and horizontal lines from the printouts.
Vertical or horizontal lines may appear when printing on paper that is larger than the paper used
immediately before it.
In such case, press [Execute] to cause a roller to press on the fusing belt and prevent vertical and
horizontal lines. Select [Belt Scratches] if vertical or horizontal lines appear on the edges of the paper.
Select [Uneven Gloss: Short Time] if there are patches of uneven glossiness.
203
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
Belt Scratches
Selection
Press [Execute].
Uneven Gloss: Short Time
0516 Manage Multiple Fusing Units by Counter
Display the counter of Fusing Unit parts.
Setting Items
Fuser Unit No.
Selection
Unit 1
Unit 2
Unit 3
Unit 4
204
Default Value
Unit 1
Setting Values
Setting Items
Remarks
Curt:Dist:Fuser Unit
Value display only.
Curt:Dist:Fusing Belt
Saved Value specified in Fuser Unit No. is
displayed under Current Value.
Curt:Dist:Fusing Rllr
Curt:Dist:Press Rllr
Curt:Dist:Thermistor
Curt:Dist:Separation Pad
Curt:Dist:Fusing Heater
Curt:Dist:Gear Set
Curt:Page:Fuser Unit
Curt:Page:Fusing Belt
Curt:Page:Fusing Rllr
Curt:Page:Press Rllr
Curt:Page:Thermistor
Curt:Page:Separation Pad
Curt:Page:Fusing Heater
Curt:Page:Gear Set
Curt:Paper Feed :Clng Web
Curt:Rot:Clng Web
Curt:Smooting Time
Finishing: Finisher
0601 Staple Position: Across Feed 1
Adjust the vertical position of the staple (applied at an edge) when using Finisher SR5050 or Booklet
Finisher SR5060.
Press [ ] to move the stapling position away from the side edge of the sheet or [ ] to move it toward the
edge.
205
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Trailing
edge
Leading
edge
Paper feed direction
DFZ001
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0
2
-2
1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 LEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS LEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
16K LEF
16K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0602 Staple Position: Across Feed 2
Adjust the vertical distance (up and down) between the staples (dual) when using Finisher SR5050 or
Booklet Finisher SR5060.
Press [ ] to move the two stapling positions away from the center and each other or [ ] to move them
toward each other.
206
Setting Values
Trailing
edge
Leading
edge
Paper feed direction
DFZ002
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0
115
-16
1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
75
A4 LEF
115
A4 SEF
28
B5 JIS LEF
75
B5 JIS SEF
0
11 × 17 SEF
98
81/2 × 14 SEF
34
81/2 × 11 LEF
98
81/2 × 11 SEF
34
8K SEF
85
16K LEF
16K SEF
12
Other Paper Sizes
115
0603 Staple Position: With Feed
Adjust the horizontal position of the staples when using Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
207
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Press [ ] to move the stapling position away from the trailing edge of the sheet or [ ] to move it toward
the edge.
Leading
edge
Trailing
edge
Paper feed direction
DFZ003
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0
2
-2
1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 LEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS LEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
16K LEF
16K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0604 Paper Alignment for Stapling: Across Feed
Adjust the width of the Staple Jogger*1 when using the staple function on Finisher SR5050 or Booklet
Finisher SR5060.
208
Setting Values
Use the function to reduce the dispersion of paper orientation at a right angle due to paper size,
thickness, curl and so on.
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the width.
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.0
-1.0
0.1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 LEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS LEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
16K LEF
16K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
*1 A guide for aligning output sheets when using the stapling function. The guide is located inside the finisher.
0605 Paper Alignment for Stapling: With Feed
Adjust the Tip Stopper movement when using the staple function applied at an angle on Finisher
SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
Use the function to reduce the dispersion of paper orientation in the feeding direction due to paper size,
thickness, curl and so on.
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the amount of movement.
209
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
2.5
-2.5
0.1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 LEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS LEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
16K LEF
16K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0606 Number of Sheets Align for Stapling
Specify the number of sheets to align for stapling at one time.
If too many sheets are delivered to the shift unit, the stacked sheets may not be correctly aligned due to
the paper type and paper condition.
If that happens, adjust the setting to the optimal value for the paper you are using.
When the number is less, it takes more time to align and productivity may fall.
210
Setting Values
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
4
4
0
1
sheet
A4 LEF
6
6
A4 SEF
4
4
B5 JIS LEF
6
6
B5 JIS SEF
4
4
81/2 × 11 LEF
6
6
81/2 × 11 SEF
4
4
16K LEF
6
6
16K SEF
4
4
Other Paper Sizes
4
9
Setting Items
A3 SEF
B4 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
8K SEF
0607 Punch Position: Across Feed
Adjust the vertical position of the punch holes when using Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
Press [ ] to move the position forward (up), or [ ] to move it backward (down).
2 Holes Top
Paper feed direction
2 Holes Left
Paper feed direction
CVK007
211
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
2 Holes JP / EU
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
2.0
-2.0
0.5
mm
3 Holes US
4 Holes EU
4 Holes NE
2 Holes US
0608 Punch Position: With Feed
Adjust the horizontal position of the punch holes when using Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher
SR5060.
Press [ ] to move the position toward the top edge (left) relative to the paper feed direction, or [ ] to
move it toward the bottom edge (right).
2 Holes Top
Paper feed direction
2 Holes Left
Paper feed direction
CVK008
Setting Items
2 Holes JP / EU
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.5
mm
3 Holes US
4 Holes EU
4 Holes NE
2 Holes US
0609 Punch Skew Correction
Specify whether or not to correct the punch skew when using Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher
SR5060.
212
Setting Values
If jamming or ear-fold occurs at the punch section especially when thin paper is used, set it to [No].
Setting Items
Values
Setting
Off
Default Value
On
On
0610 Amount of Punch Skew Correction
Adjust the level of skew correction when using Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
Use the function to reduce the punch skewing caused by paper size, thickness, curl and so on.
To skew while punching, set [ ] to increase the correction level.
Setting Items
A4 LEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.0
-1.0
0.5
mm
B5 JIS LEF
A5 LEF
A5 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
51/2 × 81/2 LEF
51/2 × 81/2 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0611 Paper Alignment in Shift Tray Setting
Specify the alignment precision of output sheets during Shift Sorting when using Finisher SR5050 or
Booklet Finisher SR5060.
Use this function when the topmost sheet of the stacked paper is skewed.
Select [Accuracy Priority] to lower the shifting speed of the tray to reduce the skew caused by inertia.
Setting Items
Setting
Values
Speed Priority
Default Value
Speed Priority
Accuracy Priority
213
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
0612 Paper Alignment in Shift Tray: Across Feed
Adjust the width of Paper Alignment Jogger*1 on the Shift Tray when sheets are ejected and delivered to
the Shift Tray of Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
Use the function to reduce the dispersion of paper orientation at a right angle due to paper size,
thickness, curl and so on.
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the width.
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.0
-1.0
0.1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 LEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS LEF
B5 JIS SEF
A5 LEF
A5 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
51/2 × 81/2 LEF
51/2 × 81/2 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
*1 A guide for aligning output sheets when using the shift function. The guide is located inside the finisher.
0613 Output Tray Descending Position
Specify the tray descent range according to the paper weight when sheets are ejected and delivered to
the Shift Tray of Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
The machine lowers the Paper Exit Guide each time it ejects stapled sheets. If the descent range is not
appropriate for the paper weight, it may cause the paper to be improperly ejected or a diversion of
sheets on the tray. Select the descent range appropriate for the paper you are using.
214
Setting Values
Setting Items
Setting
Values
Paper Weight 1
Default Value
Paper Weight 1
Paper Weight 2
Paper Weight 3-8
0614 Exit Guide Close Timing
Specify the timing to close the Paper Exit Guide when sheets are ejected and delivered to the Shift Tray
of Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
The machine opens and closes the Paper Exit Guide each time it ejects stapled sheets. If the Paper Exit
Guide does not open and close at a proper timing, bending may occur with the stapled stack when
stapled sheets fail to be properly ejected. Select the timing appropriate for the paper you are using.
Setting Items
Setting
Values
Default
Default Value
Default
Thin Paper
0615 Output Trail Edge Press Setting
Specify whether or not to hold the trailing edge of sheets when they are ejected and delivered to the
Shift Tray of Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
If too many sheets are delivered to the Shift Tray, the Ejected sheets may not be correctly aligned due to
the paper type and paper condition.
Setting it to [On] reduces the diversion of sheets.
Setting Items
Setting
Values
Auto
Default Value
Auto
On
Off
0616 Output Fan Setting
Specify the fan operation to the sheets on the Shift Tray when sheets are ejected and delivered to the
Shift Tray of Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
Blowing air peels off the sheets in close contact.
215
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
Values
Setting
Auto
Default Value
Auto
On
Off
0617 Output Fan Level
Specify the air flow of the fan on the Shift Tray when sheets are ejected and delivered to the Shift Tray of
Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060.
Increase the level if the sheets ejected on the Shift Tray are in close contact.
Setting Items
Values
Setting
Standard
Default Value
Standard
Increase Air Volume
0618 Staple Position for Booklet
Adjust the horizontal position of the booklet staples when using Booklet Finisher SR5060.
Press [ ] to move the position left, or press [ ] to move it right on the open booklet.
Paper feed direction
CWY016
216
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.0
-1.0
0.1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
SRA3 SEF
SRA4 SEF
13 × 191/5 SEF
13 × 19 SEF
13 × 18 SEF
123/5 × 191/5 SEF
123/5 × 181/2 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
226 × 310mm SEF
310 × 432mm SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0619 Folding Position for Booklet
Adjust the horizontal position of the folding when using Booklet Finisher SR5060.
Press [ ] to move the position left or press [ ] to move it right on the open booklet.
Folding position
Paper feed direction
CWY017
217
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.0
-1.0
0.1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
SRA3 SEF
SRA4 SEF
13 × 191/5 SEF
13 × 19 SEF
13 × 18 SEF
123/5 × 191/5 SEF
123/5 × 181/2 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
226 × 310 mm SEF
310 × 432 mm SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0620 Paper Alignment for Booklet: Across Feed
Adjust the width of the Staple Jogger*1 when using Booklet Finisher SR5060.
Use the function to reduce the dispersion of paper orientation at a right angle due to paper size,
thickness, curl and so on.
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the width.
218
Setting Values
Setting Items
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
0.5
-0.5
0.1
mm
A3 SEF
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
SRA3 SEF
SRA4 SEF
13 × 191/5 SEF
13 × 19 SEF
13 × 18 SEF
123/5 × 191/5 SEF
123/5 × 181/2 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
226 × 310 mm SEF
310 × 432 mm SEF
Other Paper Sizes
*1 A guide for aligning output sheets when using the stapling function. The guide is located inside the finisher.
0621 Set Number of Folds for Booklet
Specify the number of booklet folds to be performed when using Booklet Finisher SR5060.
You can adjust the paper folding strength by changing the number of folds per the booklet.
When you select "0", the default value, the finisher folds the booklet according to the number of sheets
in the booklet, as shown below.
• 1–13 sheets: 1 time
• 14–15 sheets: 2 times
• 16–25 sheets: 3 times
The value set here is added to the default values, which are 1, 2, and 3. Set a negative value to reduce
the number of times the finisher folds booklets. Set -1, -2, or -3 to not fold booklets that have 1 to 13
sheets, 14 to 15 sheets, or 16 to 25 sheets, respectively.
219
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
Setting
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0
9
-3
1
times
0622 Paper Alignment for Booklet: With Feed
Adjust the Tip Stopper movement when using the booklet binding function on Finisher SR5050 or
Booklet Finisher SR5060.
Use the function to reduce the dispersion of paper orientation in the feeding direction due to paper size,
thickness, curl and so on.
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the amount of movement.
Setting Items
A3 SEF
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
SRA3 SEF
SRA4 SEF
13 × 191/5 SEF
13 × 19 SEF
13 × 18 SEF
123/5 × 191/5 SEF
123/5 × 181/2 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
226 × 310 mm SEF
310 × 432 mm SEF
Other Paper Sizes
220
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
2.0
-2.0
0.1
mm
Setting Values
0623 Z-fold Skew Correction
Select the method to correct the skew during Z-folding on the fold unit.
Selecting [No] disables skew correction.
Selecting [Yes] enables correction by striking.
[On: Reverse] corrects by both striking and reverse rotation of Registration Roller.
Setting Items
Values
Setting
Off
Default Value
On: Reverse
On
On: Reverse
0624 Amount of Z-fold Skew Correction
Adjust the striking amount of paper during Z-folding skew correction.
Use this function when Z-folding skew correction causes a side effect.
The default striking amount "0.0" is set to 9 millimeters. Press [ ] to reduce the striking amount. The
amount becomes 0 millimeter when the value is "-9.0".
Setting Items
Setting
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
0.0
-9.0
0.5
mm
0625 Amount of Z-fold Skew Correction: Reverse
Adjust the reverse rotation amount of Registration Roller during Z-folding skew correction.
Use this function when Z-folding skew correction causes a side effect.
The default reverse rotation amount "0.0" is set to 3 millimeters. Press [ ] to reduce the reverse rotation
amount. The amount becomes “0” millimeter when the value is "-3.0".
Setting Items
Setting
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
0.0
-3.0
0.5
mm
0626 Maximum No. Stacked Sheets in Output Tray
Specify the number of sheets to stack on the Shift Tray at the time of shift sorting.
221
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
To avoid paper jams, specify the number according to the paper size.
Setting Items
Values
Paper Length 216
Default
Default Value
Default
1500 Sheets
1000 Sheets
216<Paper Length 432
Default
1000 Sheets
500 Sheets
432<Paper Length
Default
500 Sheets
0630 Staple Position for Booklet
Adjust the position of the Saddle Stitch Staple. In left and right spread status, move to right with [ ] and
to left with [ ].
This function can be used with Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Paper feed direction
CWY016
222
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.0
-1.0
0.1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
SRA3 SEF
SRA4 SEF
310 × 432mm SEF
226 × 310mm SEF
13 × 191/5 SEF
13 × 19 SEF
13 × 18 SEF
123/5 × 191/5 SEF
123/5 × 181/2 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0631 Folding Position for Booklet
Adjust the position of the Saddle Stitch Staple. In left and right spread status, move to right with [ ] and
to left with [ ].
This function can be used with Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
223
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Folding position
Paper feed direction
CWY017
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.0
-1.0
0.1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
SRA3 SEF
SRA4 SEF
310 × 432mm SEF
226 × 310mm SEF
13 × 191/5 SEF
13 × 19 SEF
13 × 18 SEF
123/5 × 191/5 SEF
123/5 × 181/2 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0632 Staple Position: Across Feed 1
Adjust the position of the staple in the vertical direction at the time of Edge Stapling.
Use [ ] or [ ] to expand or reduce the distance to the paper side end.
224
Setting Values
This function can be used with Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Trailing
edge
Leading
edge
Paper feed direction
DFZ001
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
2.0
-2.0
0.1
mm
B4 JIS LEF
A4 LEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS LEF
B4 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
16K LEF
16K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0633 Staple Position: Across Feed 2
Adjust the space of the two staples in the vertical direction.
Use [ ] or [ ] to expand or shrink the space.
This function can be used with Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
225
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Trailing
edge
Leading
edge
Paper feed direction
DFZ002
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
115
-14.5
0.5
mm
B4 JIS SEF
75
A4 LEF
115
A4 SEF
28
B5 JIS LEF
75
B5 JIS SEF
0
11 × 17 SEF
98
81/2 × 14 SEF
34
81/2 × 11 LEF
98
81/2 × 11 SEF
34
8K SEF
85
16K LEF
16K SEF
12
Other Paper Sizes
115
0634 Staple Position: With Feed
Adjust the space of the two staples in the vertical direction.
Use [ ] or [ ] to expand or shrink the space.
226
Setting Values
This function can be used with Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Leading
edge
Trailing
edge
Paper feed direction
DFZ003
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
2.0
-2.0
0.1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 LEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS LEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
16K LEF
16K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0635 Punch Position: Across Feed
Adjust the position (top and bottom) of punch holes in the across direction.
Use [ ] or [ ] to move punch hole up or down.
This function can be used with Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
227
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
2 Holes Top
Paper feed direction
2 Holes Left
Paper feed direction
CVK007
Setting Items
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
2.0
-2.0
0.5
mm
2 Holes JP / EU
3 Holes US
4 Holes EU
4 Holes NE
2 Holes US
0636 Punch Position: With Feed
Adjust the position of the punch holes in the feeding direction.
Use [ ] to move away from the back end, and [ ] to move toward the back end.
This function can be used with Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
2 Holes Top
Paper feed direction
2 Holes Left
Paper feed direction
CVK008
228
Setting Values
Setting Items
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.5
mm
2 Holes JP / EU
3 Holes US
4 Holes EU
4 Holes NE
2 Holes US
0638 Set Number of Folds for Booklet
Specify the number of booklet folds to be performed when using Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher
SR5120.
You can adjust the paper folding strength by changing the number of folds per the booklet.
When you select "0", the default value, the finisher folds the booklet according to the number of sheets
in the booklet, as shown below.
• 1–6 sheets: 1 time
• 7–10 sheets: 2 times
• 11–30 sheets: 6 times
Setting Items
Number of Folds for Booklet
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0
6
-6
1
times
0666 Staple Tray: Rib Installed Mode to Strengthen Paper
Set the operation when the Paper Strengthening Rib is installed to Staple Tray.
This function can be used with Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Setting Items
Setting
Values
Off
Default Value
Off
On
• Before you set [Staple Tray: Rib Installed Mode to Strengthen Paper] to [On], attach the paper
strengthening ribs.
229
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
0667 Accuracy Priority for Stapling
Set the accuracy priority for stapling.
This function can be used with Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Setting Items
Values
Setting
Speed Priority
Default Value
Speed Priority
Accuracy Priority
0668 Accuracy Priority for Booklet
Set the accuracy priority for stapling.
This function can be used with Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120.
Setting Items
Values
Setting
Speed Priority
Default Value
Speed Priority
Accuracy Priority
Finishing: Fold
0701 Z-fold Position 1
Adjust the fold position of the end segment (S) when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
L
S
Paper feed direction
DWP561
230
mark indicates
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0702 Z-fold Position 2
Adjust the overall fold size (L) of the Z-foldout sheets when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (L).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
mark indicates
L
S
Paper feed direction
DWP561
231
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0703 Half Fold Position: 1 sheet Fold
Adjust the fold position (S) of the half folded sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S).
This setting will be applied if the 1 sheet fold function is enabled.
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
L1
S
Paper feed direction
DWP562
232
mark indicates
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
SRA3 SEF
SRA4 SEF
310 × 432 mm SEF
226 × 310 mm SEF
13 × 191/5 SEF
13 × 19 SEF
13 × 18 SEF
123/5 × 191/5 SEF
123/5 × 181/2 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0704 Half Fold Position: Multi-sheet Fold
Adjust the fold position (S) of the half folded sheets (multisheet fold) when using the fold unit.
This setting will be applied if the multisheet fold function is enabled.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
mark indicates
233
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
L1
S
Paper feed direction
CWY007
Setting Items
A3 SEF
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
SRA3 SEF
SRA4 SEF
310 × 432 mm SEF
226 × 310 mm SEF
13 × 191/5 SEF
13 × 19 SEF
13 × 18 SEF
123/5 × 191/5 SEF
123/5 × 181/2 SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
234
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
Setting Values
0705 Letter Fold-out Position 1: 1 sheet Fold
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment (S2) of letter foldout sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the
fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S2).
This setting will be applied if the 1 sheet fold function is enabled.
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
mark indicates
S2
L
Paper feed direction
DWP563
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B5 JIS SEF
0.0
3.0
-3.0
0.2
mm
12 × 18 SEF
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
Setting Items
A3 SEF
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0706 Letter Fold-out Position 1: Multi-sheet Fold
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment (S2) of letter foldout sheets (multisheet fold) when using
the fold unit. This setting will be applied if the multisheet fold function is enabled.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S2).
235
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
mark indicates
S2
L
Paper feed direction
CWY008
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B5 JIS SEF
0.0
3.0
-3.0
0.2
mm
81/2 × 14 SEF
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
Setting Items
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
81/
2 × 11 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0707 Letter Fold-out Position 2: 1 sheet Fold
Adjust the overall fold size (L) of letter foldout sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (L).
This setting will be applied if the 1 sheet fold function is enabled.
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
236
mark indicates
Setting Values
S2
L
Paper feed direction
DWP563
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B5 JIS SEF
0.0
3.0
-3.0
0.2
mm
12 × 18 SEF
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
Setting Items
A3 SEF
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0708 Letter Fold-out Position 2: Multi-sheet Fold
Adjust the overall fold size (L) of letter foldout sheets (multisheet fold) when using the fold unit. This setting
will be applied if the multisheet fold function is enabled.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (L).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
mark indicates
237
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
S2
L
Paper feed direction
CWY008
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B5 JIS SEF
0.0
3.0
-3.0
0.2
mm
81/2 × 14 SEF
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
Setting Items
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0709 Letter Fold-in Position 1: 1 sheet Fold
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment (S) of letter fold-in sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the
fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S).
This setting will be applied if the 1 sheet fold function is enabled.
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
S
L
Paper feed direction
DWP564
238
mark indicates
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0710 Letter Fold-in Position 1: Multi-sheet Fold
Adjust the fold position of the bottom segment of letter fold-in sheets (multisheet fold) when using the fold
unit.
This setting will be applied if the multisheet fold function is enabled.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
S
mark indicates
L
Paper feed direction
CWY009
239
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0711 Letter Fold-in Position 2: 1 sheet Fold
Adjust the inner fold size (L) of letter fold-in sheets (1 sheet fold) when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (L).
This setting will be applied if the 1 sheet fold function is enabled.
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
S
L
Paper feed direction
DWP564
240
mark indicates
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0712 Letter Fold-in Position 2: Multi-sheet Fold
Adjust the inner fold size (L) of letter fold-in sheets (multisheet fold) when using the fold unit. This setting
will be applied if the multisheet fold function is enabled.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (L).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
S
mark indicates
L
Paper feed direction
CWY009
241
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
81/2 × 11 SEF
0.0
4.0
0.0
0.2
mm
8K SEF
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
Setting Items
A3 SEF
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0713 Double Parallel Fold Position 1
Adjust the fold position (S1) of the bottom segment 1 of double parallel-folded sheets when using the
fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S1).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge. The illustration below shows a gatefold sheet partially opened in the half-folded state.
L1
S1
Paper feed direction
DWP565
242
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0714 Double Parallel Fold Position 2
Adjust the fold position (S2) of the bottom segment 2 of double parallel-folded sheets when using the
fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S2).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
mark indicates
L4
L3
S2
Paper feed direction
DWP566
243
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0715 Gate Fold Position 1
Adjust the fold position (S1) of the bottom segment 1 of gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S1).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge. The illustration below shows a gatefold sheet partially opened in the half-folded state.
S1 S2
L3
Paper feed direction
DWP567
244
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0716 Gate Fold Position 2
Adjust the fold position (S2) of the bottom segment 2 of gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S2).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the mark indicates
the trailing edge. The illustration below shows a gatefold sheet partially opened in the half-folded state.
S1 S2
L3
Paper feed direction
DWP567
245
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0717 Gate Fold Position 3
Adjust the fold position (S3) of the bottom segment 3 of gatefold sheets when using the fold unit.
Press [ ] to increase and [ ] to reduce (S3).
The mark indicates the leading edge (relative to the paper feed direction), and the
the trailing edge.
L3
S3
Paper feed direction
DWP568
246
mark indicates
Setting Values
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
4.0
-4.0
0.2
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS SEF
12 × 18 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
8K SEF
Other Paper Sizes
Finishing: Perfect Binder
0801 Perf Bind Cvr Sht Posit: Across Feed
Adjust the vertical alignment of the cover sheet position when performing perfect binding.
When you bind the copies with the perfect binder, make this adjustment if the center of the book block's
spine and the center of the cover sheet are misaligned vertically.
Press [ ] or [ ] to move the image backward or forward.
Spine of the book
Front
cover
Paper feed direction
CWY011
Setting Items
Setting
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
5.0
-5.0
0.1
mm
247
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
0802 Perf Bind Cvr Sht Posit: With Feed
Adjust the horizontal alignment of the cover sheet position when performing perfect binding.
When you bind the copies with the perfect binder, make this adjustment if the center of the book block's
spine and the center of the cover sheet are misaligned horizontally.
Press [ ] or [ ] to move the image feed direction or reverse feed direction.
Spine of the book
Front
cover
Paper feed direction
CWY010
Setting Items
Setting
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
5.0
-5.0
0.1
mm
0803 Perfect Binding Finishing Angle
Square the top, bottom, and outside edges when trimming a deck of paper.
Make this adjustment if the three edges of the deck of paper cut by the perfect binder are not square.
Enter the distance from the square part at each edge.
Fore Edge
Tail Edge
Head Edge
DWP570
248
Setting Values
Setting Items
Head Edge
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
10.0
-10.0
0.1
mm
Tail Edge
Fore Edge
0804 Applying Binding Glue
Adjust the amount of binding glue for perfect binding.
If there is not enough glue, some pages may not stick.
If there is too much glue, the glue may be squeezed out of the binding and stick the pages together
making it difficult to open the booklet.
Setting Items
Setting
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.00
0.30
-0.30
0.05
mm
Finishing: Stacker
0901 Ppr Align in Stack Tray: Acr Feed 1
Adjust the alignment width in Main Jogger*1 when output sheets are stacked on the stacker.
Use the function to reduce the dispersion of paper orientation at a right angle due to paper size,
thickness, curl and so on.
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the width.
249
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.0
-1.0
0.1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 LEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS LEF
B5 JIS SEF
A5 LEF
A5 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
51/2 × 81/2 LEF
51/2 × 81/2 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
*1 A guide for aligning output sheets when they are ejected and delivered to the stacker. The guide is
located inside the stacker.
0902 Ppr Align in Stack Tray: Acr Feed 2
Adjust the alignment width in Sub Jogger*1 when output sheets are stacked on the stacker.
Use the function to reduce the dispersion of paper orientation at a right angle due to paper size,
thickness, curl and so on.
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the width.
Setting Items
A3 SEF
B4 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
250
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.0
-1.0
0.1
mm
Setting Values
*1 A guide for aligning output sheets when they are ejected and delivered to the stacker. The guide is
located inside the stacker.
0903 Paper Alignment in Stacker Tray: With Feed
Adjust the alignment position of the Tip Stopper when output sheets are ejected on the Stacker.
Use the function to reduce the dispersion of paper orientation in the feeding direction due to paper size,
thickness, curl and so on.
Press [ ] or [ ] to decrease or increase the amount of movement.
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.0
-1.0
0.1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 LEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS LEF
B5 JIS SEF
A5 LEF
A5 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
51/2 × 81/2 LEF
51/2 × 81/2 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0904 Ppr Align in 2nd Stack Tray: Acr Feed 1
Adjust the alignment width in Main Jogger*1 when output sheets are stacked on the 2nd stacker.
Use the function to reduce the dispersion of paper orientation at a right angle due to paper size,
thickness, curl and so on.
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the width.
251
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.0
-1.0
0.1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 LEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS LEF
B5 JIS SEF
A5 LEF
A5 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
51/2 × 81/2 LEF
51/2 × 81/2 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
*1 A guide for aligning output sheets when they are ejected and delivered to the stacker. The guide is
located inside the stacker.
0905 Ppr Align in 2nd Stack Tray: Acr Feed 2
Adjust the alignment width in Sub Jogger*1 when output sheets are stacked on the 2nd stacker.
Use the function to reduce the dispersion of paper orientation at a right angle due to paper size,
thickness, curl and so on.
Press [ ] or [ ] to increase or decrease the width.
Setting Items
A3 SEF
B4 JIS SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
252
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.0
-1.0
0.1
mm
Setting Values
*1 A guide for aligning output sheets when they are ejected and delivered to the stacker. The guide is located
inside the stacker.
0906 Ppr Align in 2nd Stack Tray: With Feed
Adjust the alignment position of the Tip Stopper when output sheets are ejected on the 2nd stacker.
Use the function to reduce the dispersion of paper orientation in the feeding direction due to paper size,
thickness, curl and so on.
Press [ ] or [ ] to decrease or increase the amount of movement.
Setting Items
A3 SEF
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
0.0
1.0
-1.0
0.1
mm
B4 JIS SEF
A4 LEF
A4 SEF
B5 JIS LEF
B5 JIS SEF
A5 LEF
A5 SEF
11 × 17 SEF
81/2 × 14 SEF
81/2 × 11 LEF
81/2 × 11 SEF
51/2 × 81/2 LEF
51/2 × 81/2 SEF
Other Paper Sizes
0907 Maximum Stack Quantity in Stacker Tray
Specify the maximum number of sheets that can be stacked on the stacker tray. The setting applies to
both the 1st and 2nd stackers.
The maximum number of sheets you can set differs depending on the size, thickness, and paper curl. Set
the maximum number by specifying a ratio based on the number of sheets. Select [Large Size] when
using paper whose vertical and horizontal lengths are 210 mm or longer whose area is 81/2 × 11 or
wider. Select [Small Size] when using other size paper.
253
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
Major paper sizes that apply to each item are as follows:
• Large Size: A3
81/2 × 11
or larger (up to 13 × 191/5 ), B4 JIS , A4
• Small Size: B5 JIS
, A5
, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 ,
, 51/2 × 81/2
If the unit detects that the number of sheets reaches the set upper limit, a warning message will appear.
Setting Items
Values
Large Size
Default Value
100%
100%
75%
50%
25%
Small Size
100%
50%
75%
50%
25%
Density Difference Printing: Across Feed
1000 Density Difference Printing: Across Feed
To reduce image density diff. vertically, set 18 shts ppr of min. 279mm wide/min. 420mm long, in the
tray. Then select 6 for slider setting and execute printing. Adjustment will reflect to last 2 sheets.
Setting Items
Black
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
254
Default
Value
Max.
Value
Min.
Value
Step
Unit
1
7
1
1
–
Setting Values
Finishing: Interposer
2101 Detect JAM573
Set ON / OFF for JAM573 (detection of multi feed).
If this is set to [On], the machine detects double feeding and so keeps unintended blank sheets out of the
delivered paper. The machine may erroneously detect double feeding when using special paper.
To prevent erroneous detection of double feeding, set this to [Off].
Setting Items
Interposer Upper Tray
Values
Off
Default Value
Off
On
2101 Detect JAM574
Set ON / OFF for JAM574 (detection of multi feed).
If this is set to [On], the machine detects double feeding and so keeps unintended blank sheets out of the
delivered paper. The machine may erroneously detect double feeding when using special paper.
To prevent erroneous detection of double feeding, set this to [Off].
Setting Items
Interposer Lower Tray
Values
Off
Default Value
Off
On
255
6. Adjustment Settings for Operators
256
7. Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to resolve problems that have occurred.
Getting Started
This section describes the items to check when the machine does not work properly.
When the Machine Makes a Beeping Sound
The machine makes various beeping sounds to alert users about machine conditions.
The table below describes the factory default beeping patterns and their meanings.
Beep pattern
Single short beep
Meaning
Notification Sound
Login/Logout
Cause
A control panel or screen key was
pressed. You also hear a beeping
sound in this pattern when you log in
to or out from the machine.
Short, then long beep
Operation Invalid
An invalid key was pressed on the
control panel or screen, or the entered
password was incorrect.
2 long beeps
Warm-up
When the power is turned on or the
machine exits Sleep mode, the
machine has fully warmed up and is
ready for use.
5 long beeps repeated four
times.
Sound of Less Urgent Level
Paper tray is empty.
5 short beeps repeated five
times.
Sound of Urgent Level
The machine requires user attention
because paper has jammed, the toner
needs replenishing, or other problems
have occurred.
• Users cannot mute the beeping sound of alert the machine is currently making. When the machine
is making the beeping sound to alert users of a paper jam or toner request, if the machine's covers
are opened and closed repeatedly within a short space of time, the beeping sound might continue,
even after normal status has resumed.
257
7. Troubleshooting
• You can change the sound type and volume. For details about Sound, see "DEVICE", Device
Management.
When You Check the Indicator Lamps, Status Icons, and Messages on the
Control Panel
The status of the machine is indicated by the indicator lamps on the control panel, the status icons, and
messages that appear. This section describes the location of the indicator lamp for the [Check Status]
key and explains where the status icons and messages appear on the control panel.
1
2
3
3
DWQ552
1. Indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key
A lamp lights up in red or flashes yellow if manual operations are required. For details about the [Check
Status] screen, see page 260 "When the indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key is lit or flashing".
2. Status icons
A status icon appears on the control panel if paper is added or paper jams are cleared. For details about the
status icons that appear, see page 259 "When a status icon is displayed".
3. Messages
Messages appear on the control panel to indicate the status of the machine, such as error messages or status
messages. For details about the problems that cause messages to appear and the corrective actions to be
taken, see page 268 "When Messages Appear".
258
Getting Started
When a status icon is displayed
This section describes the status icons displayed when the machine requires the user to remove misfed
paper, to add paper, or to perform other procedures.
Status Icon
: Paper Misfeed icon
Status
Appears when a paper misfeed occurs.
For details about removing jammed paper, see page 273
"Removing Jammed Paper".
: Load Paper icon
Appears when paper runs out.
For details about loading paper, see page 107 "Loading
Paper".
: Add Toner icon
Appears when toner runs out.
For details about adding toner, see page 299 "Adding
Toner".
: Add Staple icon
Appears when staples run out.
For details about adding staples, see page 304 "Adding
Staples".
: Waste Toner Full icon
Appears when the waste toner bottle is full.
For details about replacing the waste toner bottle, see
page 302 "Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle".
: Hole Punch Receptacle Full icon
Appears when the hole punch receptacle is full.
For details about removing punch waste, see page 292
"Removing Punch Waste".
: Waste Staple Full icon
Appears when the waste staple receptacle is full. For details
about removing staple waste, see page 293 "Removing
Staple Waste".
: Service Call icon
Appears when the machine is malfunctioning or requires
maintenance.
: Open Cover icon
Appears when one or more covers of the machine are
open.
259
7. Troubleshooting
When the indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key is lit or flashing
If the indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key lights up or flashes, press the [Check Status] key to
display the [Check Status] screen. Check the status of each function in the [Check Status] screen.
[Check Status] screen
1
2
4
3
DWQ553
1. [Mach./Applic. Stat] tab
Indicates the status of the machine.
2. [Check]
If an error occurs in the machine, press [Check] to view details.
Pressing [Check] displays an error message or the screen. Check the error message displayed on the screen
and take the appropriate action. For details about how to resolve the problems described in error messages,
see page 268 "When Messages Appear".
3. Messages
Displays a message that indicates the status of the machine.
4. Status icons
The status icons that can be displayed are described below:
: The machine is performing a job.
: An error has occurred on the machine.
: The machine cannot be used because an error has occurred in the machine. This icon may also appear if
the toner is running low.
The following table explains problems that cause the indicator lamp for the [Check Status] key to light or
flash.
260
Getting Started
Problem
Cause
Solution
Documents and reports do
not print out.
There is no paper left.
Load paper. For details about loading
paper, see page 107 "Loading Paper".
Documents and reports do
not print out.
The paper output tray is full.
Remove the prints from the tray.
An error has occurred.
A item with the status "Error
Occurred" in the [Check
Status] screen is defective.
Press [Check], read the displayed
message, and then take the
appropriate action. For details about
error messages and their solutions, see
page 268 "When Messages Appear".
When You Have Problems Operating the Machine
Problem
Cause
Solution
The machine does not turn
on.
The AC power switch has
not been turned on.
Turn on the AC power switch. For
details about the AC power switch, see
page 297 "General Requirements".
The indicator lamp remains
lit and the machine does not
enter Sleep mode even
though the [Energy Saver]
key was pressed.
In some cases, the machine
does not enter Sleep mode
when the [Energy Saver] key
is pressed.
Before you press the [Energy Saver]
key, check that Sleep mode can be
enabled. For details about enabling
Sleep mode, see page 80 "Saving
Energy".
The display is turned off.
The machine is in Low Power
mode.
Press the [Check Status] key to cancel
Low Power mode.
The display is turned off.
The machine is in Sleep
mode.
Press the [Energy Saver] key or the
[Check Status] key to exit Sleep mode.
Nothing happens when the
[Check Status] key is
pressed.
The power is turned off.
Make sure the main power indicator is
off, and then turn on the power.
The power turns off
automatically.
The Weekly Timer setting is
set to [Main Power Off].
Change the Weekly Timer setting. For
details about the Weekly Timer setting,
see "Timer Settings", Device
Management.
261
7. Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Solution
The user code entry screen is Users are restricted by User
displayed.
Code Authentication.
For details about how to log in when
User Code Authentication is enabled,
see page 100 "When the
Authentication Screen is Displayed".
The Authentication screen
appears.
Basic Authentication,
Windows Authentication, or
LDAP Authentication is set.
Enter your login user name and user
password. For details about the
Authentication screen, see page 100
"When the Authentication Screen is
Displayed".
An error message is still
displayed, even if misfed
paper is removed.
Paper is still jammed in the
tray.
Remove the jammed paper by
following the procedures displayed on
the control panel. For details about
removing jammed paper, see
page 273 "Removing Jammed Paper".
An error message is still
displayed, even if the
indicated cover is closed.
One or more covers that are
not indicated are still open.
Close all the covers of the machine.
Images are printed on the
reverse side of the paper.
You may have loaded the
paper incorrectly.
Load the paper correctly. For details
about loading paper, see page 107
"Loading Paper".
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Using curled paper often
causes misfeeds, soiled
paper edges, or slipped
positions while staple or
stack printing is performed.
• Flatten the paper with your hands
to straighten out the curl.
• Load the paper up side down so
that the curled edges face
downward. For details about
recommended paper, see
page 129 "Recommended
Paper".
• Place cut paper on a flat surface
to prevent paper from curling,
and do not lean it against the
wall. For details about the proper
way to store paper, see
page 151 "Paper Storage".
262
Getting Started
Problem
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Cause
Solution
The tray's side or end fences
may not be set properly.
• Remove the misfed paper. For
details about removing jammed
paper, see page 273 "Removing
Jammed Paper".
• Check that the side or end fences
are set properly. Also, check that
the side fences are locked. For
details about setting the side and
end fences, see page 120
"Changing the Paper Size".
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Paper of undetectable size
has been loaded.
• Remove the misfed paper. For
details about removing jammed
paper, see page 273 "Removing
Jammed Paper".
• If you load a paper size that is not
selected automatically, you need
to specify the paper size with the
control panel. For details about
specifying paper size using the
control panel, see page 127
"Changing to a Size That Is Not
Automatically Detected".
Misfeeds occur frequently.
There is a foreign object on
the output tray.
• Remove the misfed paper. For
details about removing jammed
paper, see page 273 "Removing
Jammed Paper".
• Do not place anything on the
output tray.
Misfeeds occur frequently.
The staple cartridge is not set Set the staple cartridge properly. For
correctly.
details about how to add staples, see
page 304 "Adding Staples".
263
7. Troubleshooting
Problem
264
Cause
Solution
Paper jam occurs repeatedly A paper jam may occur
at the paper entrance of the when paper smaller than A4
finisher.
and heavier than 348 g/m2
is fed into the finisher in the
vertical orientation.
When feeding paper smaller than A4
and heavier than 348 g/m2 into the
finisher, load the paper in the
horizontal orientation to reduce the risk
of a paper jam. Also, change the
output destination to the stacker to
prevent paper jam from occurring
when the paper size is smaller than B5.
Misfeeds occur when
printing to envelopes.
The envelopes are curled.
Make sure you fully flatten curled
envelopes before you load them. Do
not stack envelopes over the specified
limit for the paper tray. If misfeeds still
occur after the envelopes have been
flattened, load envelopes on the tray
one at a time and print them
individually. For details about how to
load envelopes, see page 146
"Envelopes".
When printing to envelopes,
the envelopes may be fed in
together, or the envelopes
may not be fed.
The envelopes are curled.
Make sure you fully flatten curled
envelopes before you load them. Do
not stack envelopes over the specified
limit for the paper tray. If misfeeds still
occur after the envelopes have been
flattened, load envelopes on the tray
one at a time and print them
individually. For details about how to
load envelopes, see page 146
"Envelopes".
Cannot print in duplex
mode.
You have selected a paper
tray that is not set for duplex
printing.
Change the setting for "Apply Duplex"
in "Tray Paper Settings" to enable
duplex printing for the paper tray. For
details about setting "Apply Duplex",
see page 154 "Tray Paper Settings".
Cannot print in duplex
mode.
You have selected a paper
type that cannot be used for
duplex printing.
In "Tray Paper Settings", select a paper
type that can be used for duplex
printing. For details about setting
"Paper Type", see page 154 "Tray
Paper Settings".
Getting Started
Problem
Paper is bent.
The print image is not
properly positioned on the
paper.
Cause
Solution
Paper may be bent when it is Change the output tray to the finisher
ejected from the finisher
shift tray.
upper tray.
• The machine has not
detected the paper
type and/or width
correctly.
Contact the machine administrator or
your service representative.
• The print position is not
aligned properly.
The machine does not turn
off in 15 minutes after the
main power is turned off.
The machine cannot perform
the shutdown procedure.
An error has occurred when
the Address Book is
changed from the display
panel or Web Image
Monitor.
The Address Book cannot be Wait a while, and then retry the
changed while you delete
operation.
the multiple stored
documents.
Output paper to the stacker
tray does not align properly.
• Paper is curled.
• When using coated
paper, the output
paper to the stacker
tray might fail to align
properly.
Repeat the shutdown procedure. If the
machine does not turn off, contact your
service representative.
• When the paper is curled
downward, select [П Curl
Correction Level: Small], [П Curl
Correction Level: Medium] or [П
Curl Correction Level: Large]
under [Correct Output Paper
Curl] in "Adjustment Settings for
Operators".
• When the paper is curled
upward, select [U Curl Correction
Level: Small], [U Curl Correction
Level: Medium] or [U Curl
Correction Level: Large] under
[Correct Output Paper Curl] in
"Adjustment Settings for
Operators".
For details about Adjustment Settings
for Operators, see page 171
"Adjustment Settings for Operators".
265
7. Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Solution
Output paper to the stacker
tray does not align properly.
When the paper weight is
280.0 g/m2 or more, and
the paper size is A3, SRA3
or larger, the output paper
to the stacker tray might fail
to align properly.
Select [П Curl Correction Level: Small],
[П Curl Correction Level: Medium] or
[П Curl Correction Level: Large] under
[Correct Output Paper Curl] in
"Adjustment Settings for Operators".
For details about Adjustment Settings
for Operators, see page 171
"Adjustment Settings for Operators".
Fold
266
Problems
Causes
Solutions
Wrinkling occurs when Gate
Fold, Letter Fold-in, or Letter
Fold-out is applied.
Wrinkling can occur if Gate
Fold, Letter Fold-in, or Letter
Fold-out is applied to B4 JIS
(Japanese Industrial
Standard) , A3 , 8 1/2"
14" , 11" 17" , 12"
18" , 8K , or larger
sizes of paper.
When applying Gate Fold, Letter Foldin, or Letter Fold-out to paper larger
than A4, we recommend you enable
image reduction and use paper no
larger than A4 .
When you print Z-folded
paper, the machine
indicates that the output tray
is full even though the
amount of output paper on
the tray is less than the stack
capacity.
The Z-fold support tray is not
set.
Set the Z-fold support tray for finisher
or multi-folding unit. For details about
how to add the Z-fold support tray, see
page 59 "Guide to Functions of the
Machine's External Options".
The multi-folding unit outputs
sheets with creased edges
when Gate Fold is applied.
The paper is curled.
The position of the fold is
incorrect when Letter Fold-in
is applied to a B5 JIS sheet.
Multi-sheet Fold has been
specified when only one
sheet is being printed.
• Remove the paper, and then
reload it upside down.
• Remove the paper, and then
reload it in the opposite direction.
Change the printer driver Letter Fold-in
settings so that Multi-sheet Fold is not
specified.
Getting Started
• There are times when images might not turn out as you want because of paper type, paper size, or
paper capacity problems. Use the recommended paper. For details about recommended paper,
see page 129 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types".
267
7. Troubleshooting
When Messages Appear
This section describes the machine's main messages. If other messages appear, follow their instructions.
When Messages Appear and the Machine Cannot Be Operated
Message
Cause
Solution
"Please Wait."
The cable which connects
the machine and the
external color controller is
disconnected.
Securely connect the machine and
external color controller by using the
cable.
"Please Wait."
This message appears when
you press the [Energy Saver]
key or the [Check Status]
key.
Wait for a while. If the machine is not
ready in 5 minutes, turn off the power
and make sure the main power
indicator turns off. Wait at least 20
seconds, and then turn on the power
again. If the machine is still not ready
in 5 minutes, contact your service
representative.
"Please wait."
This message appears when
the machine is warming up.
• Wait until the message
disappears. Do not turn off the
power while the message is
showing.
• If the machine is not ready in 10
minutes, turn off the power and
make sure the main power
indicator turns off. Wait at least
20 seconds, and then turn on the
power again. If the machine is still
not ready in 10 minutes, contact
your service representative.
268
When Messages Appear
Message
"Please wait."
Cause
This message appears when
you change the toner
cartridge.
Solution
• Wait until the message
disappears. Do not turn off the
power while the message is
showing.
• If the message does not
disappear in 5 minutes, turn off
the power and make sure the
main power indicator turns off.
Wait at least 20 seconds, and
then turn on the power again. If
the message remains displayed
for more than 5 minutes, contact
your service representative.
"Please wait."
The current environmental
condition is outside the
recommended temperature
range for the machine.
• Check the optimum environmental
conditions for the machine and
move it to a different location.
• Leave the machine for a while
and allow it to adapt to the
environment.
For details about the optimum
environmental conditions for the
machine, see page 307 "Optimum
Environmental Conditions After Moving
the Machine".
269
7. Troubleshooting
Message
"Shutting down... Please
wait. Main power will be
turned off automatically.
Maximum waiting time: 11
minute(s)"
Cause
Solution
The shut down procedure
has begun because the
power was turned off while
the machine was in standby
mode or performing an
operation.
• Follow the message that appears
and wait until the machine has
shut down. Do not turn on the
power while this message is
displayed. If the power has been
turned on, follow the message
that appears. For details about
turning on and off the power, see
page 79 "Turning On/Off the
Power".
• The shutdown time varies
according to the options that are
installed and the environmental
conditions of the location where
the machine is set up. If the main
power indicator remains lit after
15 minutes have elapsed, contact
your service representative.
"The power cord(s) has been
disconnected or the breaker
switch is turned off. Turn the
main power off, plug in the
cord(s) to the wall outlet,
and then turn the breaker
switch on."
270
• One of the two power
cords is not plugged
into the wall outlet.
• The earth leakage
breaker is in the Off
position.
• Securely plug the two power
cords directly into the wall outlet.
For details about the power
connection, see page 306
"Where to Put Your Machine".
• For details about handling the
earth leakage breaker, see
page 320 "Checking the Earth
Leakage Breakers".
When Messages Appear
When Other Messages Appear
Message
Cause
"Failed to read the PDF file."
There is a possibility that the
PDF version is not supported
by the browser's PDF viewer
or an unsupported
encryption level is specified.
Solution
With this machine's browser PDF files
other than those whose versions and
encryption levels are specified below
cannot be viewed.
• PDF version: 1.3-1.7
• PDF encryption level: 128Bit AES
or 256Bit AES
"Following output tray is full.
Remove paper."
The output tray is full.
• Remove paper from the output
tray to resume printing. If paper is
delivered to the finisher shift tray
and you want to prevent paper
from falling off the tray, press the
[Stop] key to suspend printing,
and then remove the paper.
• When using the multi-folding unit,
the number of sheets per paper
stack depends on the paper type
and fold type.
"Internal cooling fan is
active."
"Self checking..."
Large print runs will cause
the machine's interior to heat
up, triggering the cooling
fan.
The fan will emit noise, but this is
normal and the machine will be
operable while the fan is running.
The machine is performing
image adjustment
operations.
The machine may perform periodic
maintenance during operations. The
frequency and duration of
maintenance depends on the humidity,
temperature, and printing factors such
as number of prints, paper size, and
paper type. Wait for the machine to
resume operation.
The amount of paper that can be
printed and the total operation time
until the fan starts running depends on
the temperature of the location at
which the machine is installed.
271
7. Troubleshooting
When problems occur while logging in
Message
Cause
Solution
"Cannot log in."
The entered login user name
or login password is not
correct.
For details about the correct login user
name and login password, see
"Configuring User Authentication",
Security Guide.
"Cannot log in."
The machine cannot perform
authentication.
For details about authentication, see
"Configuring User Authentication",
Security Guide.
When the user lacks privileges to perform an operation
Message
"You do not have the
privileges to use this
function."
272
Cause
The logged in user name
does not have permissions
for the selected function.
Solution
For details about how to set
permissions, see "Limiting Available
Functions", Security Guide.
Clearing Misfeeds
Clearing Misfeeds
This chapter describes what to do when paper is misfed (become jammed inside the machine).
Removing Jammed Paper
• Some of this machine's internal components get very hot. For this reason, take care when
removing misfed paper. Not doing so could result in burns.
• Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when removing misfed paper, pulling out or
pushing in the finisher's staple unit. You can trap and injure your fingers if you do not.
• When removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.
• Keep your hands clear of the inside of the ring binder and the space under the ring binder tray.
You can trap your fingers if you do not.
• When removing paper misfeeds, do not turn off the power. If you do, the configured functions and
values will be lost.
• To prevent paper misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper inside the machine.
• If paper jams continue to occur, see page 261 "When You Have Problems Operating the
Machine" for details about how to resolve the problem. If the actions recommended in this manual
cannot resolve the problem, contact your service representative.
• When removing jammed paper, you can touch only those areas explicitly indicated in the manual.
• Do not remove the fusing unit. Doing so will result in loss of print quality.
• To remove paper that has not been fed into the fixing section correctly, remove the jammed paper
through the underside of the fusing unit. If the jammed paper cannot be removed through the
underside of the fusing unit, remove it from the top.
Locating jammed paper
A misfeed has occurred in the place corresponding to the letter displayed on the control panel.
Open the front cover at the location indicated by the displayed letter, and check for a paper jam. If a
lamp is lit, open the guide plate at the location indicated by the lamp, and check for a paper jam.
273
7. Troubleshooting
DWQ505
• Multiple paper misfeed locations may be indicated at the same time. When this happens, check all
the areas indicated.
• If there is no misfed paper in the area you check first, see the other areas that are indicated.
• If coated paper frequently becomes jammed and causes "U" to appear, contact your service
representative.
• If a paper misfeed occurs in Rb1 – Rb5, check whether any paper has been output on top of the
paper press of the finisher shift tray. If there is paper on top of the paper press, remove the paper,
and then remove the misfed paper from inside the finisher.
Procedure for removing jammed paper
1. Remove the jammed paper by following the procedures that are displayed on the control
panel.
When [Previous] or [Next] is displayed, press [Next] after completing a procedure.
2. When the jammed paper is removed, restore the machine to the original state.
• When you pull out and push back the right paper tray, make sure that B2 and B3 guide plates are
closed. If you pull out and push back the right drawer unit while B2 and B3 guide plates are open,
the right paper tray may hit the guide plates, which could result in damage to the machine.
274
Clearing Misfeeds
DFL005
• Do not leave the right drawer unit pulled out for a long time when removing paper from B or C.
Some parts may be deformed and require replacement if you leave the unit pulled out for more
than 10 hours.
• When you remove jammed paper from C6 and D3, the toner that was not fixed to the paper may
attach to the carrier belt and the area around it. If the toner is attached, dampen the cleaning cloth
that comes with the machine or similar cloth and wipe the toner off, and then wipe the area again
with a dry cloth.
EDC301
• If a paper jam occurs when using banner paper of 700.1 mm–1260 mm (27.56–49.61 inches) in
length, open all guide plates along the feeding path in which the paper jam occurred and remove
the jammed paper.
Removing jammed paper when the procedure is not displayed on the control panel
If a paper jam has occurred in certain locations, the procedure for removing the jammed paper is not
displayed on the control panel. Open the front cover in the place corresponding to the letter displayed
(on the control panel), and then proceed as instructed on the sticker or sheet inside the front cover, or in
the following descriptions. If a lamp is lit when the front cover is opened, open the guide plate at the
indicated location, and remove the jammed paper.
275
7. Troubleshooting
When L is displayed
DWP559
276
Clearing Misfeeds
When Mc1 – Mc4 is displayed
BQL010S
When Mc5 or Mc6 is displayed
BQL011S
277
7. Troubleshooting
When Mc7 or Mc8 is displayed
• Open the front right
cover of the ring binder.
• Fully remove the unit by • Remove any jammed
pulling on handle Mc8.
paper.
• Pull down lever Mc7.
• Return the unit to its
original position.
• Return lever Mc7 to its
original position.
• Remove any bound
booklets that are inside
the machine.
• Close the front right
cover of the ring binder.
• Remove any jammed
bound booklets from
the paper exit.
DFG007
When Mk1 or Mk2 is displayed
• Open the interposer
and Mk1 covers.
• Open the Mk2 cover,
and then remove
misfed paper.
• Close the Mk2, Mk1, and interposer covers.
• Remove paper if the display reports a paper
jam in Mk3 - Mk5.
CXG010
278
Clearing Misfeeds
When Mk3 – Mk5 is displayed
• Raise the interposer
unit.
• Raise levers Mk4 and
Mk5.
• Remove misfed paper.
• Open the upper left
cover (Mk3).
• Remove misfed paper.
• Return levers Mk4
and Mk5 to their
original positions.
• Return the upper left
cover (Mk3) and
interposer unit to their
original positions.
• Check that the LED on the front right cover of the perfect binder is unlit.
• Remove paper if the display reports a paper jam in Mk7 - Mk14.
CXG011
When Mk6 is displayed
• Open the front cover of the bridge unit (to the right of the perfect binder).
• Raise lever Mk6, and then remove misfed paper.
• Return lever Mk6 to its original position.
• Close the front cover of the bridge unit.
CXG012
279
7. Troubleshooting
When Mk7 or Mk8 is displayed
• Check that the LED on
the front right cover of
the perfect binder is
unlit.
• Open the front right
and front left covers of
the perfect binder.
• Raise lever Mk8, and then remove misfed paper.
• Return lever Mk8 to its original position.
• Close the front left and front right covers of the
perfect binder.
• Raise lever Mk7, and
then remove misfed
paper.
• Return lever Mk7 to its
original position.
CXG013
When Mk9 – Mk11 is displayed
• Check that the LED
on the front right
cover of the perfect
binder is unlit.
• Open the front right
and front left covers of
the perfect binder.
• Turn knob Mk10, and
then remove misfed
paper.
• Return lever Mk9 to
its original position.
• Lower lever Mk11.
• Remove misfed paper.
• Return lever Mk11 to
its original position.
• Close the front left
and front right covers
of the perfect binder.
• Raise lever Mk9.
CXG014
280
Clearing Misfeeds
When Mk12 – Mk14 is displayed
• Check that the LED on
the front right cover of
the perfect binder is
unlit.
• Return lever Mk12 to
its original position.
• Turn lever Mk13 to the
left.
• Remove misfed paper.
• Open the front right
and front left covers of
the perfect binder.
• Raise lever Mk12, and
then remove misfed
paper.
• Lower lever Mk14, and then remove misfed paper.
• Return levers Mk14 and Mk13 to their original positions.
• Close the front left and front right covers of the perfect binder.
CXG015
When N1 – N5 is displayed
CDN025
281
7. Troubleshooting
When N6 – N22 is displayed
• Open the multi-folding
unit front cover.
• Turn knob N5 15 to 16
times clockwise.
• Turn knob N8 21 to 22
times clockwise.
• Turn knob N6 15 to 16
times clockwise.
• Pull lever N7 to the
right.
• Remove misfed paper.
• Remove misfed paper.
• Pull handle N9 and pull
the unit fully out.
• Return lever N7 to its
original position.
• Pull lever N10 towards you,
and then check the lock is
released.
• Pull lever N10 towards you and
hold it to release the lock, and
then pull the lever to the right to
open cover N10 as shown in
the illustration below.
• Leave cover N10 in its
open position.
• Remove misfed paper
from inside.
• Close cover N10.
DFG008
282
Clearing Misfeeds
• Turn knob N11
counterclockwise.
• Open cover N12.
• Hold down lever N13.
• Open cover N15.
• Turn lever N14 to the
left.
• Turn knob N16
clockwise 7 to 8 times.
• Remove misfed paper.
• Remove misfed paper.
• Close cover N12.
• Close cover N15.
• Return levers N13
and N14 to their
original positions.
• Lower lever N17 to
the right.
• Pull lever N18 to the
right.
• Remove misfed paper.
• Return levers N17
and N18 to their
original positions.
• Turn knob N19
clockwise 8 to 9 times.
• Raise lever N21.
• Open cover N22.
• Open cover N20.
• Remove misfed paper.
• Turn knob N8 clockwise 21 to 22 times.
• Return lever N21 to its
original position.
• Remove misfed paper.
• Remove misfed paper.
• Close cover N22.
• Return the unit to its original position.
• Close the multi-folding unit front cover.
DFG009
283
7. Troubleshooting
When Rb1 – Rb5 is displayed (When Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060 is installed)
• Open the finisher front
cover.
• Raise lever Rb1, and
then remove misfed
paper.
• Turn knob Rb2, and
then remove misfed
paper.
• Raise lever Rb3, and
then remove misfed
paper.
• Return lever Rb3 to its
original position.
• Return lever Rb1 to its
original position.
• Turn lever Rb4 to the
right, and then
remove misfed paper.
• Raise lever Rb5 to the right, and then
remove misfed paper.
• Return lever Rb4 to its
original position.
• Close the finisher front cover.
• Return lever Rb5 to its original position.
CXG020
When Rb6 – Rb9 is displayed (When Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060 is installed)
• Open the finisher front
cover.
• Pull lever Rb7 to the
left.
• Lower lever Rb6.
• Turn knob Rb8, and
then remove misfed
paper.
• Pull lever Rb9 to the
left.
• Return levers Rb6
and Rb7 to their
original positions.
• Remove misfed paper.
• Close the finisher front cover.
CXG021
284
Clearing Misfeeds
When Rb10 – Rb17 is displayed (When Booklet Finisher SR5060 is installed)
• Open the finisher front
cover.
• Turn knob Rb11 9 to
11 times.
• Turn knob Rb10.
• Turn knob Rb14, and
then remove misfed
paper.
• Pull handle Rb12, and
then pull out the
staple unit.
• Raise lever Rb13, and
then remove misfed
paper.
• Return lever Rb13 to
its original position.
• Lower lever Rb15,
and then turn knob
Rb16.
• Raise lever Rb17, and then remove misfed
paper.
• Remove misfed paper.
• Return the staple unit to its original position,
and then close the finisher front cover.
• Return lever Rb17 to its original position.
CXG024
When Rb12 – Rb13 is displayed (When Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060 is
installed)
• Open the finisher front
cover.
• Raise lever Rb13, and then remove misfed
paper.
• Pull handle Rb12, and
then pull out the
staple unit.
• Return lever Rb13 to its original position.
• Return the staple unit to its original position,
and then close the finisher front cover.
CXG033
285
7. Troubleshooting
When Rb1 – Rb5 is displayed (When Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120 is installed)
• Open the Finisher Shift • Open the Rb1 guide
board and remove the
Tray 1 Cover and
remove the misfed paper. misfed paper.
• Then close the cover.
• Open the Rb4 guide
board and remove the
misfed paper
• Open the Rb5 guide
board and remove the
misfed paper.
• Then close the guide
board.
• Then close the guide
board.
• Rotate Rb2 in the
direction of the arrow
to remove the paper
and then close the
guide board.
• Open the Rb3 guide
board and remove the
misfed paper.
• Then close the guide
board.
EDB311
When Rb6 – Rb9 is displayed (When Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120 is installed)
• Open the Rb6 guide
board.
• Open the Rb7 guide
board.
• Rotate Rb8 in the
direction of the arrow
to remove the misfed
paper.
• Open the Rb9 guide
board to the left.
• Holding the Rb9 guide board, remove the paper.
• Close the finisher front cover.
EDB312
286
Clearing Misfeeds
When Rb10 – Rb17 is displayed (When Booklet Finisher SR5120 is installed)
• Open the finisher front
cover.
• Turn knob Rb11 9 to
11 times.
• Turn knob Rb10.
• Turn knob Rb14, and
then remove misfed
paper.
• Pull handle Rb12, and
then pull out the
staple unit.
• Raise lever Rb13, and
then remove misfed
paper.
• Return lever Rb13 to
its original position.
• Lower lever Rb15,
and then turn knob
Rb16.
• Raise lever Rb17, and then remove misfed
paper.
• Remove misfed paper.
• Return the staple unit to its original position,
and then close the finisher front cover.
• Return lever Rb17 to its original position.
CXG024
When Rb12 – Rb13 is displayed (When Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120 is
installed)
• Open the finisher front
cover.
• Raise lever Rb13, and then remove misfed
paper.
• Pull handle Rb12, and
then pull out the
staple unit.
• Return lever Rb13 to its original position.
• Return the staple unit to its original position,
and then close the finisher front cover.
CXG033
287
7. Troubleshooting
When Rt1 or Rt2 is displayed
• Open the trimmer front • Hold down lever Rt2
and remove misfed
cover.
paper.
• Turn lever Rt1 to the
right, and then remove
misfed paper.
• Return lever Rt1 to its
original position.
• Remove misfed paper
from the trimmer tray.
• Return lever Rt2 to its
original position.
• Close the trimmer front
cover.
DFG010
Removing Jammed Staples
If a staple jam occurs, remove the jammed staple by following the procedures indicated in the animation
that appears on the control panel. This section describes how to remove jammed staples when the
procedure is not displayed on the control panel.
• Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when removing misfed paper, pulling out or
pushing in the finisher's staple unit. You can trap and injure your fingers if you do not.
• Curled paper may cause staples to jam. To avoid this, turn paper over in the tray.
• When the finisher is installed, after jammed staples are removed, staples will not be ejected the first
few times when you use the stapler. If a staple jam occurs on the saddle stitch, the stapler will not
staple after the jammed staples are removed.
• The sheet which lists the procedure for removing jammed staples is on the inside of the front cover
of the finisher.
• Remove the jammed staples according to the finisher type. Check the type if you are unsure of the
finisher type. For details about type of finisher, see page 59 "Guide to Functions of the Machine's
Options".
288
Clearing Misfeeds
Finisher SR5050 or Booklet Finisher SR5060
Open the finisher
front cover.
Pull handle Rb18,
and then pull out
staple unit.
Open the face
plate of the
cartridge.
Turn knob Rb19
counterclockwise to
rotate the staple unit.
Pull out the
cartridge lever.
Remove jammed
staples.
Pull down the face
plate until it clicks.
Pull out the cartridge
gently.
Hold the lever,
and then push in
the cartridge.
Push the cartridge until it clicks.
Return the staple unit to its original position.
Close the finisher front cover.
CDN016
289
7. Troubleshooting
Finisher SR5110 or Booklet Finisher SR5120
• Open the finisher front
cover.
• Pull handle Rb18, and
then pull out staple
unit.
• Pull out the cartridge.
• Turn knob Rb19
counterclockwise to
rotate the staple unit.
• Pull out the Waste
Staple Receptacle,
then empty it.
• Put the receptacle
back.
• Remove the empty refill
in the direction of the
arrow.
• Push in the new
cartridge until it clicks.
• Hold the green lever
and push in the
cartridge until it clicks,
then raise the lever.
• Push the cartridge until it clicks.
• Return the staple unit to its original position.
• Close the finisher front cover.
EDB314
290
Clearing Misfeeds
Booklet Finisher SR5060 or Booklet Finisher SR5120 (Saddle Stitch)
• Pull out the booklet
staple unit.
• Pull out the cartridge
levers.
• Pull out the cartridge
gently.
• Remove the empty
refill in the direction of
the arrow.
• Push in the new cartridge • Gently push down the
until it clicks.
upper unit until it
clicks.
• Hold both sides of the
cartridge, then raise
the upper unit.
• Hold the green lever
and push in the
cartridge.
• Until it clicks, then raise the lever.
• Return the staple unit to its original position.
• Close the finisher front cover.
EDB315
Removing Jammed Ring Combs
If ring combs become jammed, a message appears on the control panel. Follow the message's
instructions to remove the jammed ring combs. This section describes how to remove jammed ring combs
when the procedure is not displayed on the control panel.
• Keep your hands clear of the inside of the ring binder and the space under the ring binder tray.
You can trap your fingers if you do not.
291
7. Troubleshooting
BQL013S
• The ring combs set in the ring comb cartridge might move or become slanted when you remove the
jammed ring combs from the ring comb cartridge. Before replacing the cartridge, check that all the
ring combs are straight and properly aligned.
Removing Punch Waste
If the punch receptacle is full, remove punch waste by following the procedures indicated in the
animation that appears on the control panel.
• While "Hole Punch Receptacle is full. Empty it." is displayed, you cannot use the Punch function.
• "Hole Punch Receptacle is full. Empty it." is displayed until the punch waste box is installed again.
• If the message is still displayed, install the punch waste box again.
292
Clearing Misfeeds
Removing Staple Waste
If the staple waste box is full, remove staple waste by following the procedures stated in the animation
that appears on the control panel.
• While "Waste Staple Receptacle is full. Empty it." is displayed, you cannot use the staple function.
• "Waste Staple Receptacle is full. Empty it." is displayed until the staple waste box is reinstalled.
• If the message is still displayed, reinstall the staple waste box.
Removing Waste Paper
If the waste paper receptacle is full, remove waste paper by following the procedures stated in the
animation that appears on the control panel.
• While "The waste paper receptacle is full. Empty the receptacle." is displayed, you cannot use the
perfect binding.
• While "The Trimmer waste paper receptacle is full. Empty the receptacle." is displayed, you cannot
use the trimmer.
• "The waste paper receptacle is full. Empty the receptacle." or "The Trimmer waste paper receptacle
is full. Empty the receptacle." is displayed until the receptacle is reinstalled.
• If the message is still displayed, reinstall the receptacle.
293
7. Troubleshooting
Adjusting the Color Registration Shift or Printed
Color
This chapter describes how to adjust the color registration shift or printed colors.
Adjusting Image Quality
To improve color reproduction and achieve color output with consistent quality, follow this procedure.
1. Press [Adjustment Settings for Operators] in the upper left corner of the screen.
2. Press [Machine: Image Quality].
3. Press [0201 Execute Image Quality Adjustment].
4. Press [Execute] in [Adjust All].
5. When the image quality adjustment is completed, press [Check].
6. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
• This process will take approximately 5 minutes to complete. A message is displayed on the control
panel while the process is being executed. Keep the front cover of the main unit closed until the
process is completed.
When the Color Registration Shifts
This section describes how to adjust the color registration and gradation by specifying the settings in
[Maintenance].
Adjusting the color registration
1. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon (
).
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [Maintenance].
5. Press [Color Registration].
6. Press [OK].
Auto color registration takes about 35 seconds.
7. Press [Exit].
294
Adjusting the Color Registration Shift or Printed Color
8. Press [Close].
9. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
When Unevenness in Density Appears
Perform this procedure when the printed image appears uneven in density across the feeding direction
after replacing the photoconductor unit. The in-line sensor detects unevenness of density in the printed
test pages, and the machine compensates for the unevenness with a high degree of accuracy.
• Load white paper of A3 size or larger into the paper tray. About 20 sheets of paper are required
to perform adjustment.
1. Press [Adjustment Settings for Operators] in the upper left part of the screen.
2. Press [Machine: Image Quality].
3. Press [Density Difference Printing: Across Feed].
4. Select a paper tray loaded with paper in "Select Tray for Test Print".
5. Use the slider to specify the tone to prioritize adjustment per color if necessary.
If unevenness appears in the highlights, specify a smaller value. If it appears in the shadows,
specify a larger value. To adjust all tones in well-balanced manner, perform adjustment using the
default values (K/C/M-5, Y=3).
6. Press [Execute].
16 test sheets are printed during the automatic adjustment process, and then two confirmation
charts are printed.
7. Check the confirmation charts to confirm that the unevenness of density across the feeding
direction is compensated, and then press [Reflect].
8. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
295
7. Troubleshooting
296
8. Maintenance
This chapter describes how to replace supplies and how to install this machine.
General Requirements
This section explains the items that should be followed during use of this machine.
Dos and Don'ts
• Do not place vases, plant pots, cups, toiletries, medicines, small metal objects, or containers
holding water or any other liquids, on or close to this machine. Fire or electric shock could result
from spillage or if such objects or substances fall inside this machine.
• Do not use flammable sprays or solvents in the vicinity of this machine. Also, avoid placing these
items in the vicinity of this machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so risks fire caused by overheated internal
components.
• If this machine is not going to be used for several days or longer at a time, disconnect its power
cord from the wall outlet.
• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, always pull the plug, not the cord.
Pulling the cord can damage the power cord. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire
or electric shock.
• Turn off the main power switch before unplugging the power cord. See page 80 "Turning Off the
Main Power".
• The area around the vents might feel warm. This is caused by exhaust air and is not a malfunction.
• If the machine is moved from a cold to a warm place, condensation may form inside it. After
moving the machine, do not use it for at least an hour. The machine requires this time to adapt to its
new environment.
• Do not turn off the power while the machine is in operation.
• Do not open the covers of the machine when it is in operation. If you do, misfeeds might occur.
• Do not move or tilt the machine when the power is on.
297
8. Maintenance
• Do not knock the machine while it is operating (for instance, do not use the machine's surfaces to
knock stacks of paper into square).
• Depending on the ambient temperature and humidity, steam may come from the vents at the rear
right side of the machine during printing. This is water vapor from the paper, not a sign of
malfunction.
• The anti-humidity heater warms the machine's interior to maintain the proper humidity. The heater
keeps the machine warm even if the main power switch is turned off.
Ventilation
When you use this machine in a confined space without good ventilation for a long time or print
large quantities, you might detect an odd smell.
This might cause the output paper to also have an odd smell.
When you detect an odd smell, regularly ventilate in order to keep the workplace comfortable.
• Set up the machine so that it does not directly ventilate towards people.
• Ventilation should be more than 80 m3/hr/person.
New machine smell
When a machine is new, it might have a unique smell. This smell will subside in about one week.
When you detect an odd smell, sufficiently ventilate and circulate the air in the room.
AC power switch
If the machine is not used for several days or longer at a time, set the AC power switch inside the
left front cover of the main unit to "Stand by". Make sure that the main power switch is turned off
and the main power indicator goes out before turning off the AC power switch. Not doing so may
damage the hard disk.
DET022
• The anti-humidity heater works even after the AC power switch is turned off as long as the
power cord is connected.
• In normal operation, keep the AC power switch in the "On" position.
• When you set the AC power switch to "Stand by", do not immediately set it to "On". After
setting the switch to "Stand by", wait one minute or more before setting it to "On".
298
General Requirements
Saving Printouts
• Prints will fade if exposed to strong light or dampness and humidity for lengthy periods. Preserve
the quality of your copies by storing them in a binder in a dark, dry place.
• Toner may melt if a print and a half-dried print are put on top of each other.
• Toner may also melt when using solvent type adhesive agents for pasting prints.
• When folding prints, toner in the folds will come off.
• Toner may melt if it is placed on mats made of chlorinated plastic in locations of high temperature
for long periods of time.
• Toner may melt if prints are placed in places of extremely high temperatures, such as near heaters.
Backing Up Hard Disk Data
You can store data such as Address Book information on the machine's hard disk.
This section describes how to back up or download this data.
• Avoid strong impact to the machine. Doing so may damage the hard disk.
• When turning off the power or disconnecting the power cord, follow the proper procedures. Not
doing so may damage the hard disk. For details about how to turn off the power, see page 80
"Turning Off the Main Power".
• If the machine's hard disk fails, data stored on it, including Address Book information might be lost.
For this reason, do not save important data on the machine's hard disk without backing it up or
downloading it. We also recommend backing up fonts, forms, and any other downloaded
resources that are stored on the hard disk. The manufacturer is not liable for damages resulting
from lost data.
• You can use Device Manager NX or Web Image Monitor to back up the machine's Address Book.
For details about Device Manager NX, see the manual for Device Manager NX. For details about
Web Image Monitor, see Web Image Monitor Help.
Replenishing and Replacing Consumables
This section explains precautions for adding toner or staples.
Adding Toner
This section explains precautions when adding toner and how to dispose of used toner.
299
8. Maintenance
• Do not incinerate toner (new or used) or toner containers. Doing so risks burns. Toner will ignite
on contact with naked flame.
• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers anywhere near naked flames. Doing so
risks fire and burns. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame.
• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging.
• Keep the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine away from babies
and small children at all times. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into
contact with the mouth or nose.
• Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner (including used toner). Absorbed toner
may cause a fire or explosion due to electrical contact flickering inside the vacuum cleaner.
However, it is possible to use a vacuum cleaner that is explosion-proof and dust ignition-proof. If
toner is spilled on the floor, remove the spilled toner slowly using a wet cloth, so that the toner is
not scattered.
• Do not crush or squeeze toner containers. Doing so can cause toner spillage, possibly resulting
in dirtying of skin, clothing, and floor, and accidental ingestion.
• Store toner (new or used), toner containers, and components that have been in contact with
toner out of reach of children.
• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air
environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large amounts of water. Consult
a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor
if necessary.
• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
clothing. If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wash the stained area with cold water.
Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and make removing the stain impossible.
300
General Requirements
• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
skin. If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.
• When replacing a toner or waste toner container or consumables with toner, make sure that the
toner does not splatter. Put the waste consumables in a bag after they are removed. For
consumables with a lid, make sure that the lid is shut.
• Always replace the toner cartridge when a notification appears on the machine.
• Fault may occur if you use toner other than the recommended type.
• When adding toner, do not turn off the main power. If you do, settings will be lost.
• Store toner where it will not be exposed to direct sunlight, temperatures above 35°C (95°F), or
high humidity.
• Store toner horizontally.
• Do not repeatedly install and remove toner cartridges. This will result in toner leakage.
• Do not use recycled toner. This will damage the machine.
• During toner adding, the toner container is rotating. Do not touch the toner container.
• When a toner cartridge is being used, it cannot be removed. Do not remove the cartridge forcibly.
• Do not install an empty toner cartridge.
• Immediately close the toner cartridge cover after replacing the toner cartridge. The amount of
remaining toner will not be indicated correctly while the toner cartridge cover is open.
• The machine stops printing if you leave the toner cartridge cover open.
Follow the instruction on the control panel regarding how to replace a toner cartridge.
• If "A toner cartridge is empty." and "Replace the cartridge." appear alternately, the machine will
soon stop printing. Replace the toner to maintain print quality.
• You can check the name of the required toner and the replacement procedure using the [ Add
Toner] screen.
• You can change the toner containers during printing.
• Press the [Check Status] key to check contact number where you can order supplies. See
page 323 "Inquiry".
• You can add all four color toners in the same way.
• Do not remove the outer cap of the toner cartridge before shaking it. Wait until you install the toner
cartridge before removing the cap.
301
8. Maintenance
• Do not remove the inner cap.
• If you cannot get it to click in, pull out the toner cartridge a little, slightly rotate it to the left or right,
then try again.
Disposing of used toner
Toner cannot be re-used.
Pack used toner containers in the container's box or a bag to prevent the toner from leaking out of
the container when you dispose of it.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If you want to discard your used toner container, please contact your local sales office. If you
discard it by yourself, treat it as general plastic waste material.
(mainly North America)
Please see our local company website for information on the recycling of supply products, or you
can recycle items according to the requirements of your local municipalities or private recyclers.
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle
• Do not incinerate toner (new or used) or toner containers. Doing so risks burns. Toner will ignite
on contact with naked flame.
• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers anywhere near naked flames. Doing so
risks fire and burns. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame.
• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging.
• Keep the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine away from babies
and small children at all times. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into
contact with the mouth or nose.
• Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner (including used toner). Absorbed toner
may cause a fire or explosion due to electrical contact flickering inside the vacuum cleaner.
However, it is possible to use a vacuum cleaner that is explosion-proof and dust ignition-proof. If
toner is spilled on the floor, remove the spilled toner slowly using a wet cloth, so that the toner is
not scattered.
• Do not crush or squeeze toner containers. Doing so can cause toner spillage, possibly resulting
in dirtying of skin, clothing, and floor, and accidental ingestion.
302
General Requirements
• Store toner (new or used), toner containers, and components that have been in contact with
toner out of reach of children.
• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air
environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large amounts of water. Consult
a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor
if necessary.
• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
clothing. If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wash the stained area with cold water.
Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and make removing the stain impossible.
• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
skin. If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.
• When replacing a toner or waste toner container or consumables with toner, make sure that the
toner does not splatter. Put the waste consumables in a bag after they are removed. For
consumables with a lid, make sure that the lid is shut.
• Waste toner bottles cannot be reused.
• Before removing the waste toner bottle from the machine, spread paper or some other material
around the area to keep toner from dirtying your workspace.
• When removing the waste toner bottle, do not touch the inside of the machine.
• Be careful to not allow the toner to leak from the waste toner bottle when you remove it.
• Carefully pull the waste toner bottle out horizontally when you are replacing it.
• Do not use a waste toner bottle that has not been used for a long time.
• Take care not to drop the waste toner bottle.
• Make sure the waste toner bottle is fully inserted. If it is not, toner will leak inside the machine.
• We recommend purchasing and keeping a spare waste toner bottle on hand since waste toner
bottles are consumable items.
Follow the instruction on the control panel regarding how to replace a waste toner bottle.
303
8. Maintenance
• Replace the waste toner bottle if "Waste Toner Bottle is full. Replace Waste Toner Bottle." appears
on the control panel.
• When the "Replacement of Waste Toner Bottle will soon be necessary." appears on the control
panel, the waste toner bottle should be replaced soon. Prepare a new waste toner bottle.
• Your service representative can replace the waste toner bottle if it is included in your contract. For
details, contact your local dealer or service representative.
Adding Staples
• Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray when removing misfed paper, pulling out or
pushing in the finisher's staple unit. You can trap and injure your fingers if you do not.
• Stapling failures or jams may occur if you use a staple cartridge other than that recommended.
Follow the instruction on the control panel regarding how to add staples.
• If you cannot pull out the upper unit, there are staples remaining inside the cartridge. Use all the
staples, and do not add more.
Replacing Ring Combs
• Keep your hands clear of the inside of the ring binder and the space under the ring binder tray.
You can trap your fingers if you do not.
• Use of non-recommended ring combs and/or ring comb cartridges can result in binding failures
and comb jams.
Follow the instruction on the control panel regarding how to replace ring combs.
• Add new ring combs to the cartridge only when the "Out of binding ring combs" message appears
on the control panel.
• The ring comb cartridge can hold both 100-sheet and 50-sheet type ring combs, but be sure not to
mix the two sizes inside the cartridge.
304
General Requirements
• We recommend that you prepare separate ring comb cartridges for each type and color of ring
comb.
• Store ring combs in their original packaging and stand them upright.
Changing the type of ring combs
1. Pull the ring comb cartridge out of the machine.
CET028
2. Push the ring combs up from the bottom of the cartridge.
CET029
3. Place your fingers between the cartridge and the ring combs, and then remove the
ring combs.
CET030
4. Insert the ring combs you want to use into the cartridge.
305
8. Maintenance
5. Put the cartridge back into the machine.
Filling the Glue Container
• Store binding glue in a dark room whose ambient temperature is -20 to 40°C (-4 to 104°F), away
from moisture, extremely high temperatures, direct sunlight, and open flames.
• Keep binding glue out of the reach of children.
• Use of non-recommended glue can result in failed bindings and faulty adhesion of the cover sheet
and book block.
• To use binding glue, you must first heat it. To begin the heating process, press the glue temperature
adjustment key.
Follow the instruction on the control panel regarding how to fill the glue container with binding glue.
• The container can hold up to 380 g (0.84 lb.) of glue (about two of the provided cups).
• You can change the glue heating time under [Binding Glue Heater Auto Off Timer] in [System
Settings]. For details, see "Timer Settings", Device Management.
• The glue requires up to 6.5 minutes before the binding can begin. To begin binding quickly, be
sure to press the glue temperature adjustment key in advance.
Where to Put Your Machine
This section describes precautions for installation and movement.
Moving the Machine
This section describes precautions when moving the machine.
Choose your machine's location carefully.
Environmental conditions greatly affect its performance.
• Contact your service representative if you need to lift the machine (such as when relocating it to
another floor). Do not attempt to lift the machine without the assistance of your service
representative. The machine will be damaged if it topples or is dropped, resulting in
malfunction and risk of injury to users. The machine's various handling areas are for service
engineer use only. Do not touch these areas.
306
General Requirements
• Contact your sales representative before moving the machine out of the building or to another
location in the building. A moving service can be provided for a fee.
Optimum Environmental Conditions After Moving the Machine
Optimum environmental conditions
• Be sure to locate the machine as close as possible to a wall outlet. This will allow easy
disconnection of the power cord in the event of an emergency.
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an electric shock might
occur.
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over, an injury might
occur.
• After you move the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise the machine might
move or come down to cause an injury.
• Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and spacious. Good
ventilation is especially important when the machine is used heavily.
• Keep the machine away from salt-bearing air and corrosive gases. Also, do not install the machine
in places where chemical reactions are likely (laboratories, etc.), as doing so will cause the
machine to malfunction.
Avoid the following environments when locating the machine. If the machine is placed somewhere
where the conditions are different from those recommended, a failure may occur.
• Low temperature and humidity or high temperature and humidity
The following is the recommended temperature and humidity range:
• Temperature: 10–32°C (50–89.6°F) (humidity to be 54% at 32°C, 89.6°F)
• Humidity: 15–80% (temperature to be 27°C, 80.6°F at 80%)
• Places that are exposed to direct sunlight or other sources of strong light (more than 1,500 lux)
• Places that are directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air from a heater
(Sudden temperature changes can cause condensation to form inside the machine)
307
8. Maintenance
• Places that are where the machine will be subject to frequent strong vibration
• Places that are where the machine is exposed to dampness or wet weather, such as rain and snow
• Places that are with poor ventilation
• Dusty areas
• Places that are close to machines generating ammonia, such as a diazo copy machine
• Unstable places
• Place the machine on a level spot. The machine must be level within 5 mm, 0.2 inches: both
front to rear and left to right. Place the machine on a level spot. Place the machine on a level
floor so that the differences in its height at the front/back and right/left sides are less than the
values below.
Left/right (±0.5mm/1000mm)
Front and back (±1mm/1000mm)
Optimum space for locating the machine
Place the machine near the power source, providing the clearance areas shown.
The clearance shown is necessary for using and servicing the machine.
1
4
2
3
DER110
1. Rear: 80 cm (31.5 inches) or more
2. Right: 100 cm (39.4 inches) or more
3. Front: 100 cm (39.4 inches) or more
4. Left: 100 cm (39.4 inches) or more
• For the required space when options are installed, contact your service representative.
308
General Requirements
Power connection
• Do not use any power sources other than those that match the specifications shown. Doing so
could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not use any frequencies other than those that match the specifications shown. Doing so could
result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not use multi-socket adaptors. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not use extension cords. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not use power cords that are damaged, broken, or modified. Also, do not use power cords
that have been trapped under heavy objects, pulled hard, or bent severely. Doing so could
result in fire or electric shock.
• Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic constitutes a fire and
electric shock hazard.
• The supplied power cord is for use with this machine only. Do not use it with other appliances.
Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• It is dangerous to handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so could result in electric
shock.
• If the power cord is damaged and its inner wires are exposed or broken, contact your service
representative for a replacement. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire or electric
shock.
• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet at least once a year and check for the
following:
• There are burn marks on the plug.
• The prongs on the plug are deformed.
• If any of the above conditions exist, do not use the plug and consult your dealer or service
representative. Use of the plug could result in fire or electric shock.
309
8. Maintenance
• Be sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet at least once a year and check for the
following:
• The power cord's inner wires are exposed, broken, etc.
• The power cord's coating has a crack or dent.
• When bending the power cord, the power turns off and on.
• Part of the power cord becomes hot.
• The power cord is damaged.
• If any of the above conditions exist, do not use the power cord and consult your dealer or
service representative. Use of the power cord could result in fire or electric shock.
• This machine uses two power cords. To stop the power supply of the machine completely,
remove both power plugs. Unless both power plugs are removed, fire or electric shock may
result.
• The capacity of power in this machine is 60 A and 9,000 W with both cords combined.
Connect each cord to separate power sources with independent breakers. If you connect to an
electrical outlet that is connected to the same breaker, the breaker may cut off power.
• Be sure to push the plug of the power cord fully into the wall outlet. Partially inserted plugs
create an unstable connection that can result in unsafe buildup of heat.
• If this machine is not going to be used for several days or longer at a time, disconnect its power
cord from the wall outlet.
• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, always pull the plug, not the cord.
Pulling the cord can damage the power cord. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire
or electric shock.
• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and the area around
the prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on the plug constitutes a fire hazard.
• When performing maintenance on the machine, always disconnect the power cord from the
wall outlet.
• Power Source
•
(mainly Europe and Asia)
220–240 V, 30 A, 50/60 Hz
310
General Requirements
•
(mainly North America)
208–240 V, 30 A, 50/60 Hz
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.
• Voltage tolerance
Voltage must not fluctuate by more than 10%.
• This machine uses two power cords. Connect each power plug to separate power sources with
independent breakers.
311
8. Maintenance
Maintaining Your Machine
How to Clean the Machine
• When performing maintenance on the machine, always disconnect the power cord from the
wall outlet.
• If the machine's interior is not cleaned regularly, dust will accumulate. Fire and breakdown can
result from heavy accumulation of dust inside this machine. Contact your sales or service
representative for details about and charges for cleaning the machine's interior.
• Do not use chemical cleaners or organic solvents, such as thinner or benzene. If such substances
get inside the machine or melt plastic parts, a failure might occur.
• Do not clean parts other than those explicitly specified in this manual. Other parts should only be
cleaned by your service representative.
Cleaning the Machine
Wipe the machine with a soft, dry cloth. If this does not remove the dirt, wipe the machine with a
damp and tightly wrung cloth. If a damp cloth still does not remove the dirt, try using a mild
detergent. Wipe the machine with a dry cloth to remove the moisture, after using a damp cloth.
Cleaning the Contact Image Sensor
Clean the Contact Image Sensor when you noticed a deviation of the image position before and after
performing Auto Image Position Adjustment/Image Position Feedback Correction and confirming the
adjustment result.
• Before cleaning the Contact Image Sensor, turn off the machine, and wait a while
to allow the machine to cool down fully. Otherwise, burn injury may result.
• Cleaning procedure
Use the cleaning cloth provided with the machine to wipe the glass surface, bias roller of the
revolver, and shading correction plate. Wipe the bias roller of the revolver with a soft dry cloth to
remove any moisture. If stains do not come off easily, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of
alcohol.
312
Maintaining Your Machine
1. Open the left front cover of the main unit.
EAE001
2. Raise the E2 lever, and wipe the glass surface indicated in the picture below in one
direction, either from the back to front or from the front to back.
EAE002
3. Wipe the roller of the revolver in one direction, either from the back to front or from
the front to back.
Turn the gear on the front side to rotate the roller. Wipe the bias roller and then wipe the
shading correction plate while rotating the roller of the revolver.
EAE003
• The revolver consists of the transport roller, bias roller, and shading correction plate. The
shading correction plate is a white curved surface located between the black bias rollers.
313
8. Maintenance
4. Close all covers after cleaning the unit.
Cleaning the transport roller when using NPC paper
When using NPC paper, clean the roller to prevent smears from appearing on the print side of the
paper when the transport rollers in the following locations become dirty.
• Cleaning procedure
Use the cleaning cloth provided with the machine or an equivalent item to wipe the component. If
stains do not come off easily, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of alcohol.
• Registration component
1. Open the right front cover of the main unit.
EAE009
2. Check the dirtiness of the transport rollers in the registration component.
There are four transport rollers on the upper part, and seven rollers on the lower part.
EAE010
314
Maintaining Your Machine
3. Wipe the dirt from the transport rollers on the upper part of the registration
component.
EAE011
To clean the transport roller in the back right part, wipe the roller from the lower side.
EAE012
4. Wipe the dirt from the transport rollers on the lower part of the registration
component.
EAE013
To clean the transport roller in the left part, lower the C2 lever and pull out the unit, and then
wipe the roller from the upper side.
315
8. Maintenance
EAE014
5. Close all covers after cleaning the unit.
• Output paper reversing component
1. Open the left front cover of the main unit.
EAE001
2. Raise the E2 lever, and wipe the transport roller indicated in the picture below in
one direction, either from the back to front or from the front to back.
EAE015
3. Close all covers after cleaning the unit.
316
Maintaining Your Machine
Cleaning the transport roller when using synthetic paper
When using synthetic paper, clean the roller to prevent smears from appearing on the back side of the
paper when the transport rollers in the following locations become dirty.
• Cleaning procedure
Use the cleaning cloth provided with the machine or an equivalent item to wipe the component. If
stains do not come off easily, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of alcohol.
• Duplex transfer unit
1. Open the left front cover of the main unit.
EAE001
2. Lower the F4 lever.
EAE016
3. Wipe the transport roller on the bottom side of the duplex transfer unit.
There are eight rollers on the upper side of the gap above the F4 lever.
317
8. Maintenance
EAE017
4. Close all covers after cleaning the unit.
Cleaning the Power Cord Plug
• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet at least once a year and check for the
following:
• There are burn marks on the plug.
• The prongs on the plug are deformed.
• If any of the above conditions exist, do not use the plug and consult your dealer or service
representative. Use of the plug could result in fire or electric shock.
• Be sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet at least once a year and check for the
following:
• The power cord's inner wires are exposed, broken, etc.
• The power cord's coating has a crack or dent.
• When bending the power cord, the power turns off and on.
• Part of the power cord becomes hot.
• The power cord is damaged.
• If any of the above conditions exist, do not use the power cord and consult your dealer or
service representative. Use of the power cord could result in fire or electric shock.
• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and the area around
the prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on the plug constitutes a fire hazard.
318
Maintaining Your Machine
• Turn off the main power switch before unplugging the power cord. See page 79 "Turning On/Off
the Power".
• After cleaning the power cord plug, make sure that the power cord is connected to the machine
firmly, and then connect the plug to the wall outlet.
319
8. Maintenance
Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers
• When this machine's circuit breaker is set to "Off", do not switch it to "On". Doing so could result
in electric shock, fire, smoke, or tripping of the room's breakers.
• If the earth leakage breaker is not functioning normally, contact your sales or service
representative.
An earth leakage breaker is installed on this machine, trimmer, ring binder, and perfect binder.
Once a year, check that the earth leakage breaker functions properly. Normally, the breaker is in the
On position.
The following procedure is explained using illustrations of the main unit and trimmer as an example.
1. Turn off the main power.
Make sure that the main power indicator goes out.
2. Open the left mainframe front cover, and then turn off the AC power switch.
3. Using a ballpoint pen or similar pointed object, press in the earth leakage breaker's test
button.
Main unit
DET024
320
Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers
Trimmer
CWW508
4. Check that the earth leakage breaker moves to the Off position.
Main unit
DET025
Trimmer
CWW509
321
8. Maintenance
5. Return the earth leakage breaker to the On position.
Main unit
DET026
Trimmer
CWW510
6. Turn on the AC power switch, and then close the left mainframe front cover.
7. Push the main power switch to turn on the main power.
• If the machine does not start up when you turn its main power switch back on, check whether the
earth leakage breaker is in the Off position. If the breaker is in the Off position, contact your sales
or service representative. Do not reset the earth leakage breaker yourself.
Useful Information
This section describes how to check the counter value, telephone number for repairs, or ordering
consumables such as toner.
Counter
The counter displays the total number of pages used by each of the functions.
You can also print out the counter information.
322
Checking the Earth Leakage Breakers
1. Press [Counter] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the right.
2. To print a counter list, press [Print Counter List], and then press the [Start] key.
3. Press [Exit].
Inquiry
The Inquiry function lets you check the telephone numbers to contact for repairs or ordering
consumables such as toner.
Checking Inquiry using the User Tools
Be sure to contact your service engineer to verify the following:
Supplies
• Toner
• Waste Toner Bottle
• Staple
• Staple (Booklet)
• Black Binding Combs (50 sheets)
• White Binding Combs (50 sheets)
• Black Binding Combs (100 sheets)
• White Binding Combs (100 sheets)
• Binding Glue
Machine Maintenance/Repair
• Telephone No.
• Serial No. of Machine
Sales Representative
• Telephone No.
Supply Order
• Telephone No.
1. Press [Home] (
) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon (
).
3. Press [Inquiry].
4. To print an inquiry list, press [Print Inquiry List], and then press the [Start] key.
5. Press [Exit].
Checking Inquiry using the [Check Status] key
You can check the following items under [Inquiry]:
323
8. Maintenance
• [Machine Repairs]
Displays the machine number and contact number which are required for service.
• [Sales Representative]
Displays the sales representative's telephone number.
• [Supply Order]
Displays the contact number for placing supply orders.
• [Supply Details]
Displays the name of toner, staples, etc., used on the machine.
1. Press the [Check Status] key.
DWP146
2. Press the [Maintnc./Inquiry/Mach. Info] tab.
3. Press [Inquiry].
4. After checking the information, press [Close] twice.
324
EN GB
EN US
EN AU
M0B2-1020B
© 2018, 2019
EN GB
EN US
EN AU
M0B2-1020B
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement